Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. As you work in drawing and schedule views. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. the door retains this relationship to the partition. scope. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. In this case. and schedules required for a building project. and phases when you need it. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. sections. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and plans. how to navigate the user interface. 13 Click OK.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. drawings. every drawing sheet. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the operation of the software is parametric. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 2D and 3D view. the parameter is one of association or connection. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. If you move the partition. and residential. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. quantities. click Training Files. construction. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the floor or roof remains connected. and customize the project as necessary. schedules. You learn the terminology. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 12 Select DefaultMetric. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and click Open. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. hence. drawing sheets. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. you will use the default template. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. In the Revit Architecture model. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. For most tutorial projects.rte. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. review the Revit Architecture templates. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and open Metric\Templates.

dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They display in relevant views of the model. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. filled regions. Datum elements help to define project context. doors. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and reference planes are datum elements. windows. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. tags. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and 2D detail components. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and roofs are model elements. grids. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. windows. tags. For example. levels. For example. Examples include detail lines. They help to describe or document the model.When you change something. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. dimensions. doors. For example. Understanding the Basics | 7 . View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. If you can draw. and cabinets are model components. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. programming is not required. walls.

Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. elevation views. views of the project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you do nothing to establish these relationships. first floor. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and types. section views. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. schedules. you can explicitly control them. and so forth). for example. such as roofs. or bottom of foundation. However. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Project: In Revit Architecture. This information includes components used to design the model. and drawings of the design. top of wall. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In other cases. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. floors. families. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Often. To place levels. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. from geometry to construction data. Most often. By using a single project file. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and ceilings. The project file contains all information for the building design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building.In Revit Architecture. you must be in a section or elevation view.

The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. System families can be transferred between projects. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. categories of model elements include walls and beams. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. dimensions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. However. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. specifically its clear user interface. A type can also be a style. ceilings. floors. the user interface is labeled. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. making it easy to understand what each button represents. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. In the following illustration. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. A type can be a specific size of a family. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. For example. System families include walls. roofs. and levels. and similar graphical representation. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. In the steps that follow. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. identical use.

new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. In addition. By default. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. click (New).

the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Edit. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. and View. which are listed on the menu.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. While working in the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . For example.

12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar. For example.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. a door type is specified. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. when you add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select Views (all). In the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. click the tab in the Design Bar.

delete. families. windows). To open a view. families. elevations. and groups. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and rename views. reports. schedules. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. double-click its name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and group name. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is dockable. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. walls. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. 3D). sheets.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In this case. Do not click. The cursor displays as a pencil. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. After creating a browser organization scheme. click Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

Tooltips: To see tooltips. The status bar also provides information. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. press F1 for context-sensitive help. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. There are several tools that help you find information. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Toolbar: From the toolbar. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. You can also press SHIFT+F1. regarding selected elements in a view. After you are familiar with these tasks. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. In addition. find a keyword on the Index tab. click on the Standard toolbar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Windows: From any window. 20 Press TAB. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Click the Help button. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle).18 On the Design Bar. You can use this tri-pane. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. in conjunction with tooltips. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. press F1 for help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click Modify to end the Wall command. When you place the cursor over an element. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. In the status bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. If no Help button displays.

click Training Files. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. For example. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 5 On the View toolbar. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the building model. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the drawing area. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. NOTE As you zoom in and out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. As you move the mouse. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the View toolbar. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and double-click 2nd Flr. called drag controls.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. and select the wall. Small blue dots. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Cnst. moving the wheel to the desired location. expand Floor Plans. For more information about SteeringWheels. and click Help. Similar controls. expand Views (all). 17 Type ZR. 15 To exit the wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab. bottoms. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls. press ESC. as shown. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. When drawing or modifying a building model.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . The table moves down. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. for example. such as Move and Copy. you want to move the table closer to the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. In this case.18 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. as shown. to lengthen the wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Some commands. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Tools toolbar. moving the cursor to the left horizontally.

click Lines. such as the Lines command. 26 On the Undo menu. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and drag it on top of the table. 24 Select the plant. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Move. on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the second item in the list. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). or press CTRL+Z. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Some commands.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.

29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Use keynotes to annotate a detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. When you have finished these tutorials.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. illustrating how building components work together. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. detail. but for training purposes. and annotate building assemblies. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. In Revit Architecture. 27 . or referenced as a drafting view. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Use detail components to define an assembly. In this tutorial.

2 In the Drafting View dialog.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Window Head Detail. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. you will create a drafting view. If necessary. click Drafting View. import a DWG detail. and reference a drafting view. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. for Name. click Training Files. 3 In the Scale list. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. create a reference callout.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise.

Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.dwg. displaying the extents of the detail. 10 In the drawing area. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. 9 Type ZR. click Training Files. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. select Black and White. The model zooms out. and click Open. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. located directly to the left of the drawing area.).In the Project Browser. 6 In the Colors field list. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The drawing area is still blank. as shown. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.

to activate the view selection list. select Detail View: Detail.The view displays to the specified area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 13 Click Reference other view. and in the Scale list. 14 In the drawing area. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. in the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. click Callout. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

c_express_workshop_details_start. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. in the Type Selector. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Callout. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The reference callout is created. 3 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head.rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. select Detail View: Detail. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. 2 On the Options Bar.

click Modify to clear the selection. under Detail Views(Detail). 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0. enter Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. under Detail Views (Detail). 8 On the Design Bar. for Name. double-click Wall Base 1.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region.

12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. under Graphics. right-click. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. for Display Model. 14 In the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region). 16 Click OK. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 On the View Control Bar. select As Underlay. The model elements in the view display as half-tones.

If the crop region is enlarged. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . and press ENTER. on the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. typical details can easily be placed. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 20 In the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 17 On the View Control Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . By grouping detail components. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Stud. Directly above the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. type 1' 6''.Brick on Mtl. click Detail Components.

■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. click Modify to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. and click Create Instance.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. add the following detail components as shown. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 23 Using the same method. as shown. 25 In the Project Browser.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command.

and verify that Horizontal. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. consistent means of identifying building assembly components.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and format keynote styles. click Keynote ➤ Element. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_express_workshop_details_start. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. or instructions within a construction documentation package. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Free End are selected. click Training Files. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.rvt. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Leader. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the type selector. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .txt. 4 On the Options Bar. You can customize this list. In the next exercise. and under Keynote Table. for Full Path. For more information about customizing a keynote database. special notes. map keynotes by material. click Browse. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.

TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 8 Click to place the tag. If no value has been specified. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown.5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Either move the text inside. Keynoting | 39 . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. a question mark displays. 7 Click to place the leader arm.

12 Click to place the leader arm. 15 Select 07 21 00. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Material. 13 Click to place the tag. 16 In the drawing area. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. and click OK. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation.

Only the keynotes remain selected. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 19 In the Type Selector.All items within the selection display in red. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Select Keynote Tags. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Click Check None. Click OK. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.Boxed. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. legends. 17 On the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents.

Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this exercise.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will create a sheet. Add labels to a title block. Place views on drawing sheets. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. this tutorial uses imperial units only. In this lesson. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.

Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In Revit Architecture. scroll until the folder is displayed. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click Training Files. If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. 3 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.rvt. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In the Project Browser. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. or in the element properties of the title block. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area.

right-click A602 .Unnamed. you can enter ZE to zoom out. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. double-click Checker. For Name. Then. In this tutorial. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Smith and press ENTER. 6 In the Title Block. To pan. 7 Enter K. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 9 In the Project Browser. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 5 In the drawing area. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. To zoom in and out. roll the wheel. and click Rename. click Modify to clear the selection. enter Sections/Details. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter A602.4 Type ZR. under Sheets(all). 8 On the Design Bar. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. hold down the wheel and drag. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. Click OK. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets.

Smith. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 4/10/2008. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. select Text : 1/8''. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Design Development. For Project Name. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Type ZR. select the title block. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Client Name. For Project Status. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 18 On the Options Bar. (Left) is selected. in the Type Selector. 15 In the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. click Text.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. 20 Click and type Project Status. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click OK.

under Category Parameters.21 On the Design Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. in the Type Selector. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. click (Load into Project). as shown. 22 Using the same method. 29 On the Design Bar. click Label. to add 28 Using the same method. and click. select Label : 3/16''. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. as shown. and click OK. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters.

by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. for Name. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and under Keynote Table. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.Project. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. enter Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.txt. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. click Training Files. representing the view or schedule.30 In the Reload Family dialog. In this exercise. a viewport displays. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Full Path. to a drawing sheet. click Browse. and click Yes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. place and modify a keynote legend. Next you will create. you will create.

as shown.Sections/Details. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 .Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. clear Show Headers. expand Legends. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). on the Appearance tab. 8 In the Project Browser. and drag Keynote Legend . and click OK. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Text.

Project as shown. The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .

NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend . enter Keynote Legend . at the bottom of the Filter tab. under Legends. and click Properties. and click OK. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display.Project. expand Detail Views (Detail). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Sheet. and click OK. not keynotes. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 15 In the Project Browser.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. for Filter. click Edit. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 19 Click OK twice. select Filter by sheet. for View Name. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. as shown.

The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . as shown. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view title with line displays below the viewport.Title Sheet 1. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. under Sheets (all). The view remains selected. double-click A0 . 2 In the Project Browser. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list.

3 In the Type Selector.When you place a view on a sheet. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. define the information to include in a view title. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Type ZR. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. As part of a construction document set. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. expand Schedules/Quantities. or omit view titles from sheets. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. The drawing list remains selected. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 5 In the Project Browser. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the drawing list. by default. Press ESC to clear the selection.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the selected sheets. including only sheets that contain views.Sections/Details and select A801 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. clear Appears In Drawing List. while pressing SHIFT. 8 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . select A602 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Ceiling Plans. and click Properties. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). The drawing list display is updated.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

For example. As you develop the building design. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. it is good practice to test the constraints.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. 57 . This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a curtain wall. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. a central service core. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid.

construction. you will use the default template. For this project. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. under Create new. with an RVT extension. from the product library. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. In practice. levels. 3 Under Template file. views. you design inside the elevation markers. and click Browse. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. To create the project file. and customize the project as necessary. Creating the Project In this exercise. 5 Click OK. you load any required family type that is not in your project. under Projects. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. you use a template that is provided with the software. such as a door or window. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The new project opens. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. select Project. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. West. and settings. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The project is stored as a single file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click New. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. locate the Project Browser. South. notice four elevation markers. and residential. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte. but contains no geometry. In views that display elevation markers. click Training Files. In the drawing area in the right pane. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. verify that the second option is selected. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. East.

you will want to save your work frequently. double-click Metric. You can add. heights. view the Save reminder interval.rvt) is selected. change their properties. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. expand Views (all). duplicate them. 13 In the file window.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Groups. and elevation views created in the project by the template. Creating the Project | 59 . will be accessible from the Project Browser. content and building model reports. Families. sheets. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and duplicate levels. 14 For File name. the view you see in the drawing area. Two level lines. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). As you design and document your building model. and click Training Files. verify that Project Files (*. double-click South. NOTE If you create a project without a template. Ceiling Plans. and other properties. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and on the General tab. reflected ceiling plan views. then expand Floor Plans. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. such as schedules and legends. Schedules/Quantities. schedules. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Sheets (all). enter Revit Retail Building. delete. 10 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and families in your project. 16 Click Save. and delete them. 8 Under Floor Plans. 15 For Save as type. 7 If necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. created by the template. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. display in the south elevation. notice the Legends. as well as change their names. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model.

or constrained. doors. Adding Project Levels on page 60. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). the other levels move and change with it. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. enter 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. and windows within the building model. to each other. When you begin designing. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You change the names of the 2 default levels. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Views (all). it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and double-click South. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. After you modify the two default levels. and press ENTER. so that when one level moves. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls.17 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how the levels are locked.

The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. view the Design Bar. As you move the cursor. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. enter 0. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. Next. and press ENTER. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. which should display by default. not all the tabs are visible. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 14 Click Plan View Types. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. click Level. and click OK. and then move it up.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. If it does not. and press ENTER.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. right-click. enter 01 Entry Level. By default. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. enter -1800. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you add the new level. 5 In the Project Browser. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 16 Enter 3750. and click Basics. and press ESC. and press ENTER. This is the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view.

18 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Options Bar. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 26 Press ESC. and for Offset. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. or on the Design Bar. and rename the corresponding views. you add another level. using a different option. click Rename. enter 3750. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Level. and enter 02 Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. under Floor Plans. 19 Click OK. click Modify to end the command. click (Pick Lines). 25 Click to place the level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. and move it slightly upward. right-click Level 3. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. If you create a level by copying it. Next.

Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. as shown. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Notice that by moving the top level. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. all the levels move. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock.

■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select (Draw). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. click Grid. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. specify a start point for the grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. Move the cursor up. the column height changes as well. 3 On the Options Bar. In a later exercise. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In the following exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. On the Design Bar. so that if the roof elevation changes. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. When the grid is complete. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and press ENTER. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Enter A. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter 4500 mm. Next. and click to place the line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. click (Pick Lines).5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click Grid. for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 7500 mm.

On the Options Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. as shown. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 11 On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.

click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. click Dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 18 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. 21 Press ESC twice.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). Creating a Column Grid | 67 . select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. select grid lines C and 3. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 22 While pressing CTRL.

24 Press ESC. select grid line 5. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 26 In the drawing area. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and press ESC. click the value for Center Segment. 33 On the Design Bar. and select grid line A. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click Edit/New. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 29 In the Name dialog. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. until it is closer to grid line 5. click Modify. and press ESC.5mm Bubble with Gap. 31 For End Segments Length. click Modify. (Element Properties). 32 Click OK twice. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. and click OK. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. By pinning these central grid lines. enter 6. click and drag the blue circular grip up. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and on the Options Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. and select None.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The pins are hidden. If necessary. Two pins display on the grid lines. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 50mm. click .

5mm Bubble. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). click (Grid Intersection). Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. and press ESC. 39 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. For Place By. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 37 Select the grid lines again. select Grid : 6.5mm Bubble with Gap.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Structural Column. The original continuous grid lines are restored. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. select all of the grid lines. select Grid : 6. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL.

You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Camera. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select grid line A. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 46 On the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. for From. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and unlock it. Next. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. under Floor Plans. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. lock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. 43 Press ESC. 45 While pressing CTRL. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. and press ENTER. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 47 Enter 9000. 52 On the Options Bar. select 01 Entry Level. click Activate Dimensions. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera.

you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and click OK. and then copy them to subsequent levels. expand 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Adding Beams In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . displays in bold under 3D Views. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and click Rename.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. In the Rename View dialog. When you finish adding beams. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Adding Beams on page 72. under Views (all). The current view. enter To Building. Right-click 3D View 1.

double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. view the icons on the View Control Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). Adding Beams | 73 . under 3D Views. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. The selected grid lines display as red.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. the icon on the right side of the scale. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Beam. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 4 Click Medium. 8 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 10 In the Project Browser. click Finish. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select each grid line. 3 Click the Detail Level icon .

double-click 01 Entry Level.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 Select one of the beams. under Floor Plans. press and hold SHIFT. 12 On the View toolbar. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. click (Default 3D View). and click Select All Instances. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. right-click. and click OK. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red.

resize the view to see the entire structure. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 06 Roof. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. right-click. and click OK. All of the columns display as red. view the Top Level parameter. double-click To Building. Adding Beams | 75 . Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. (Element Properties). for Top Level.to the 5th level. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Element Properties. click 24 Press ESC. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and if necessary. select 06 Roof. 20 Click Cancel. When you created the columns. 21 With the column selected. under Constraints. and click Select All Instances. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. under 3D Views.

You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 28 Save the drawing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. but you want to display them in less detail. as lines only. double-click South. under Elevations.

Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces | 77 . To better add the braces to the structure. you create 8 framing elevation views. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces on page 77. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces In this exercise. and press ESC to end the command. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. 3 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation. under Floor Plans.29 Proceed to the next exercise.

NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 Using the same technique. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. click Brace. press ESC twice. 8 In the Type Selector. but when placed the braces are placed. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. and when the endpoint snap displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. After you add the final brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). The associated framing elevation view displays. double-click the elevation marker arrow.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click to specify the start point of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 79 .

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. but this time add them from right to left. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. enter 10000 mm. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.

NOTE As you add braces. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. enter 12000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. as shown in the 3D view below. 21 Select grid line A. and press ENTER. 23 In the Project Browser.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. click Activate Dimensions. Adding Braces | 81 . periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.

Creating a Foundation on page 82. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click South. lock it. 29 In the Project Browser. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. click and roof height. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. under Floor Plans. grid size. beams. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. under 3D Views. 26 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm.24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. double-click {3D}. and drag it away from the structure. and if necessary. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 31 Save the drawing. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure.

under Extents. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. double-click 00 Foundation. In the View Range dialog. for View Range. and how to load specific families into a project. and press ESC twice. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular.rfa. and expand Structural Foundations. click Training Files. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. under View Depth. 9 Close the warning dialog. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm.Before you can add the pile caps. The foundation pile cap now displays. Creating a Foundation | 83 . A warning displays. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for Level. click Edit. expand Families. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the drawing area. Click OK twice. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. After you load the pile cap family. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. The pile cap has been added in the view. select Unlimited. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and click View Properties. In the Element Properties dialog. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice.

rvt. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. double-click {3D}.14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. right-click. and click Select All Instances. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. beam. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. You load new column. under 3D Views. beams. and brace families into the project. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change the types of the columns.

6X15.2X101. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. for Type. click (Default 3D View). 9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . This not the size that you want to use. under Dimensions. click Duplicate. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and changing its size parameter. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. select the braces in the elevation one by one. the braces as well as the beams change. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 15 In the Project Browser. The building model displays the round hollow columns. and click OK twice. enter 75mm. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 10 On the Options Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. click Brace. 17 While pressing CTRL. 19 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. The brace type changes. for d. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click Modify.5CHS. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. and click OK. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. click Edit/New. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). right-click.3 In the Type Selector. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 16 On the Design Bar.9. enter 75mm. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Modify. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. In the following steps. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. and click Select All Instances.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Open.rvt. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file.Origin to Origin. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. After the files are linked. select Auto . select m_RRB_structure_complete. 3 Under Positioning. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.

select the linked Revit model. structural members.4 In the Project Browser. while pressing CTRL. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. click Copy. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. Grids. however. select Multiple. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 9 In the drawing area. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. and click Select Link. click (Copy/Monitor). under Elevations. 8 On the Options Bar. depending on the project. select Levels 00 through 06. After the link is established. and walls could also be copy/monitored. In this case. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 6 In the drawing area. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model.

click Finish. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 16 Click OK. First. click Finish mode. for Floor Plan views. click OK. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. while pressing SHIFT. right-click Level 1. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . delete the Level 2 floor plan. and click Delete. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display.10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Using the same method.

right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 In the View Templates dialog. select the Topography : Surface. click OK. and click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 20 In the drawing area.19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. right-click. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Name. enter Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area.

Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. double-click Site. under Names. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 34 In the 3D view that displays.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. click Training Files. To create floors. and click Rename. enter To Building. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Some other Revit Architecture elements.35 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. stairs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors In this exercise. such as roofs. and click OK. and railings are also created from sketches. In this exercise.rvt. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Adding Floors on page 92. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.

3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. and elements in the current view display as gray. Leave this dimension unlocked. click Dimension. past the first vertical grid line.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. If the grid changes size. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. under Floor Plans. click Lines. On the Sketch tab. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click Floor. You are now in the Sketch Editor. select the top floor line. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Rectangle). At the top left corner of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Move the cursor to the left. Adding Floors | 93 . Do not lock the dimension. and then the first horizontal grid line.

Move the cursor to the left dimension. and change their values to 300 mm. Enter 300. Do not lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. select the top floor line. At the top left corner of the grid. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. They display on the floor sketch. and then press ESC. Select and lock the dimensions. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. press ENTER. and click the temporary dimension value.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Modify.

and on the Options Bar.8 Select the floor. Next. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. Adding Floors | 95 . This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. enter 1500mm. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. click Edit. click Floor. and for Offset. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. On the Sketch tab. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. under Floor Plans. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. on the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and press ESC. click Lines. using a different sketching technique. double-click 02 Level. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Quit Sketch. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and lock the dimensions.

click (Rectangle). The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. under Floor Plans. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Lines. double-click 03 Level. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 14 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 20 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. and a lock icon displays.

30 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 In the Project Browser. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. Alternatively. double-click {3D}. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.24 On the Design Bar. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. select 05 Roof Garden. click Finish Sketch. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and on the Options Bar. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. and lock the edges. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. 32 Select the floor. and click OK. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. under Floor Plans. click Edit. Adding Floors | 97 . and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.

When a blue dashed line displays. click to place the roof line. click Training Files. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. To create the roof. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. Adding a Roof In this exercise. click Lines. under Floor Plans. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. double-click 06 Roof. Click (Pick Lines). Adding a Roof on page 98. ■ ■ For Offset. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.rvt. enter 1800 mm.

enter 300 mm. and when the blue dashed line displays. click to place the roof line.6 Select grid line 5. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). for Offset. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 99 . move the cursor slightly below the grid line.

click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.10 Press ESC. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. select the roof. click Finish Roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).

move the cursor down below the roof. for Elevation. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). and press ENTER. click Section. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. and click to specify the section. Adding a Roof | 101 . enter -100 mm. on grid D. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof.

21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click OK 3 times. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. under Construction. select Variable. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 24 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.20 On the Design Bar. select the roof. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click 06 Roof. for Structure [1]. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. for Structure. click Edit. click Edit/New. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views.

on the View Control Bar. select Fascia : Fascia . 37 If necessary. select the section line. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Roof Edge. 41 Starting with the left front edge. click Modify. 33 In the warning dialog. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 40 In the Type Selector. click OK.31 On the Design Bar. select each edge. In this case. 38 In the 3D view. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. moving counter-clockwise. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Adding a Roof | 103 . click (Default 3D View). Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and press DELETE. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the curtain wall resizes with it. so if you resize the grid. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. you add a curtain wall. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise.42 On the Design Bar.

For Height. select 01 Entry Level. Click OK twice. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . click to place the first curtain wall segment. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. for Spacing. for Join Condition. The type is saved in the project.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Offset. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click Training Files. and click OK. enter 2100 mm. under Floor Plans. click 01 Entry Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. select Horizontal Grid Continuous.rvt. enter 600 mm. enter Retail Storefront. click Duplicate. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Under Construction. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select 05 Roof Garden. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. for Spacing. enter 1050 mm. When you duplicate a type. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. and move it slightly toward the building interior. for Type. For Level.

double-click To Building. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. click (Trim/Extend). These dimensions are not in a sketch. If you want to hide them. under 3D Views. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. and trim each curtain wall segment. you can delete the dimensions. and lock the dimensions. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. so they remain in the view. If the grid moves. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 On the View Control Bar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance on page 107. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click All. and click None. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. clear one element to clear all the elements. click Detail Level ➤ Medium.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 4 On the Model Categories tab. as these usually represent internal pilasters. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. All the elements in the list are selected. 6 Under Visibility. Do not select Columns. under the element list. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Click OK.

and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. press and hold CTRL. select System Panel : Solid. 17 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. select Architectural Elevation. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. and click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 10 Select 1 panel. click Modify. in this case an architectural elevation. Creating an Entrance | 109 . in the Type Selector. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 12 With the panels selected. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click {3D}. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for.

under 3D Views. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser.

select One Segment. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 32 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click to select it. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and unpin it. select another mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass.

click (Default 3D View). 34 On the View toolbar.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and unpin it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. and view the new entrance. select it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. press TAB until it is selected. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. open the North elevation. 40 Optionally. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 39 Using the same process.38 Press DELETE. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and 4th panels. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Graphics. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and click View Properties. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Underlay. under Floor Plans. 5 Click OK. select 02 Level. 3 Right-click in the view. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and click to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . and click Rename. The cursor changes to a pencil. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 9 In the Project Browser. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Select the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click OK. enter Display Area.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the grip closest to the callout head. which indicates you must draw the callout. click Callout. under Floor Plans.

click Section. 14 Press ESC. 12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 13 Select the section line. 16 Select the section box. as shown. and click Flip Section. right-click. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

select Basic Wall : Interior . 27 On the Options Bar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor.135mm Partition (2-hr). click Wall. Click (Rectangle). Lock both alignments. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. enter Section Display Area. click (Align). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 25 Press ESC twice. 21 In the Type Selector. select Wall faces. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. select Finish Face: Exterior. double-click 01 Entry Level. 18 In the Rename View dialog. For Loc Line.17 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. and click OK. right-click Section 1. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). 26 On the Design Bar. for Prefer. and click Rename.

you modify them to be bulkhead walls. and lock the dimension. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. click Ceiling. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 38 On the View Control Bar. 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. under Sections (Building Section). and lock the dimension. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Next. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 32 In the Type Selector. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.) 36 Press ESC twice. double-click Section Display Area.

44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. click to select it.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click to select the walls. click Attach. for Base Offset. under Sections. 46 Press ESC. click Modify. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click Section Display Area. and click OK. for Height Offset From Level. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . under Ceiling Plans. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 47 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. click (Element Properties). under Constraints. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 2700 mm. press TAB until you select the wall chain.

Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Cancel. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. click Edit/New. 54 Click OK. click Edit. 58 On the Edit toolbar.49 In the Project Browser. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Rotate). view the ceiling structure. and click . for Structure. click Cancel. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Ceiling Plans.

60 Click. enter 45. and press ENTER. 61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Optionally. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows Off. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. double-click To Building. 64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to create a reference plane to the left. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and for Offset. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt. Move the cursor over grid line B. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and copy it to the 05 Level. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm. under Floor Plans.

8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Stairs. and specify a point to create first stair flight. C. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. click Modify. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and 3.5 On the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. 6 Select the left reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 2.

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Move the cursor down. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Finish Face: Interior. including its handrails. 10 On the Options Bar. and specify a point. select Basic Wall : Generic . The complete stair displays. beyond the end of the stair. click Wall.225mm Masonry. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.

and click to select it. and lock the alignment. enter 1200 mm. and specify a point away from the wall. select Wall faces. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Select the wall. for Prefer. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Select the interior face of the wall. click Dimension. select the dimension value. click Align.15 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Lock the dimension. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Modify. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 18 Using the same technique. Select the bottom of the stair. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.

and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 While pressing CTRL. click Door. and press DELETE. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. The stair and walls move to the left. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 23 Select the stair. clear Tag on Placement. (Undo). 24 On the Standard toolbar. select both reference planes. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Because the dimension is constrained. and press DELETE. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 27 In the Type Selector. a warning displays. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. TIP To flip the door swing. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .21 Select the dimension.

verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. under Floor Plans. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click 36 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click Align. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Under Constraints. (Element Properties). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser.30 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. but if you view the top level of the building. 33 Select the stair. select 00 Foundation. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Rectangle). for Multistory Top Level. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. click Modify. 35 On the View toolbar. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). select 05 Roof Garden. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select all 4 walls. Click OK. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Click OK. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Default 3D View). click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 44 On the Tools toolbar. For Top Constraint. for Base Constraint.

51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click (Default 3D View). Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click see the roof. and lock the alignment. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. and lock the alignments. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . on the View toolbar.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. For Top Constraint. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Under Constraints. By offsetting the base. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor.55 In the Project Browser. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. enter 300 mm. and click OK. 56 Select the shaft. click 59 On the View toolbar. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. for Base Offset. (SteeringWheels). and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. under Graphics. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 2 Right-click in the view. click Wall. for Underlay.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.

225mm Masonry. The exact placement is not important. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click Open View. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 15 In the error dialog. select Elevation: South. and then select the right face of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. and click (Fillet arc). Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . 17 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. enter 9750. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 11 In the Go To View dialog. and press ENTER. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit Profile. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click (Align). and on the Options Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click . click Remove Constraints. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.

click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D}. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click . and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. under 3D Views. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. 22 In the Project Browser. and click (Circle). as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.

4.rvt. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. click Component.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_RPC Tree . TIP After you place the 1st planter. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . between grid lines C and D. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . as shown. 6 In the Type Selector. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. and press ESC twice. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.5 Meters. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 5 On the Basics tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

enter Japanese Cherry 1. View the roof.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and on the Options Bar. 14 In the Name dialog. and click OK. for Height. click Edit/New. under 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry Level. and then click OK twice. click Duplicate. 10 In the Project Browser. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. For Offset. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 18 In the Project Browser. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the Type Selector. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. click Lines. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.8 On the View toolbar. as shown. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Floor. enter 1500 mm. double-click {3D}. 11 Select one of the trees. enter 2400 mm. 16 Click Apply. 17 While pressing CTRL. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.5 Meters. select the 2 remaining trees. select M_RPC Tree .5 Meters. 21 On the Design Bar. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. under Dimensions. (Element Properties). for Type.

and click to sketch a line. for Offset. and click to place the line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. click (Draw). 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 25 Using the same method. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 29 On the Options Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .

32 Press ESC. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Trim/Extend). 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. and click to finish the line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 35 Select the line that you just drew. 34 On the Tools toolbar.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 45 Click OK. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. and click so he is facing the column. The completed sidewalk displays. select Rotate after placement. for Height Offset from Level. 49 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. for Type. 39 Select the sidewalk. enter -250 mm. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Male : Alex. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. as shown: (Element Properties). 40 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. and on the Options Bar. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click OK twice.38 On the Design Bar. enter Sidewalk. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 48 In the Type Selector. a photorealistic image displays. near Column E5. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. In plan view. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component. 42 In the Name dialog. When you render an image. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk.

you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 52 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Beetle. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. about 30 degrees. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the car. and click (Element Properties).NOTE If necessary. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 54 In the Type Selector. click Camera. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 56 Press ESC twice.

64 Select Alex. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. enter -300 mm. click Pick Host. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. 66 Using the same method. 60 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . click Pick Host. double-click West. under Constraints. and click OK. for Offset. 65 Click the sidewalk.59 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. When you select a host for a component. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. Next. under 3D Views. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. If the sidewalk changes height. and on the Options Bar. double-click To Building. 63 Click the sidewalk.

68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. After the service core is positioned. and replace them with a service core. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

3 Select the entire stairwell. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. walls. 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Press DELETE. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening. including the stairs. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. (SteeringWheels). By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files.rvt.

and on the Design Bar. expand Groups. 14 In the Project Browser. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group.rvt. expand Model. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the linked instance. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 13 In the drawing area. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. right-click m_RRB_core. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and notice that the linked file is listed. and click Create Instance. click (Align). click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. double-click 01 Entry Level. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. click Modify.

and on the Options Bar. 18 Select the core. click 21 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. ■ ■ Click grid line C. click (top down view). and click to align the center. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (SteeringWheels). Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 20 On the View toolbar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 19 On the Design Bar. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Ungroup. click Modify. (Default 3D View). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 17 On the Design Bar.

You copy the railing type into your project from another project. you add glass railings around the floor edges.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. After you modify it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. where it is hosted within a railing family. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

2 In the left pane of the dialog. click (Split). Handrail only. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 3 In the Conference project. and open Metric\m_Conference. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Expand Railing. and expand Railings. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and click to split the floor.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The floor sketch displays. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and Parapet. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Training Files. click Edit. under Floor Plans. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . click OK. double-click 02 Level. and select Glass. expand Families. in the Project Browser. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays.rvt. The rendering displays. press and hold CTRL. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Renderings.

148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. click Modify. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to place it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 25 Select grid line B. and on the Options Bar. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and click the lock to lock the alignment.15 On the Design Bar. click Lines. verify that Chain is not selected. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to draw another line. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click (Align).

26 Select grid line D. 33 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. Lock the dimensions. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. for Type. enter 100 mm. click Railing.rvt project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . click Finish Sketch. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. click (Align). select Glass. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and lock the alignment. click Dimension. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click OK. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 29 On the Design Bar.

39 Click Finish Sketch. click Camera. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

153 . lofty ceilings. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. NOTE For training purposes. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. balconies.

154 .

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. elevation. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. section. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. including plan. 155 . You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.

156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Level 2. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

under Floor Plans. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click 1: 1000. and click OK. enter Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. Next. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Elevation: Building Elevation. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. click Elevation. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. select 1:100. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.rvt.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .

162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. select 1:100. 10 In the Rename View dialog. double-click South East. expand Floor Plans. click Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. enter South East. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. select Section: Building Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it.

and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.21 On the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Floor Plan. click Callout. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. and click to specify a point to complete the callout.rvt. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Resulting callout view . select 1:50. Creating Callout Views | 167 . for Scale.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip. and select the callout boundary. click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

and click OK. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 13 In the Type Selector.7 On the Design Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. select 1:50. Creating Callout Views | 169 . double-click Section 1. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Callout. for Scale. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Creating Callout Views | 171 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Rename View dialog. expand Detail Views (Details).

rvt. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rfa. You change the appearance of the section mark head. double-click Level 1. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Open. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. select Custom-Section Head.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. the elevation markers.

enter Section Head – Custom. and can be applied to the section line. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Section Head. On the floor plan. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Load into Project. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . scroll to Section Line. scroll to Section Marks. and select 2. and click OK twice.5mm Square. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK. select the current project. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. click Edit/New. Section Tail – Filled. select Section Head . 12 For Section Tag. 10 On the floor plan. Section Tail . 19 Click OK. and click OK. 15 Under Category. select the section line. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 17 Under Category. and click OK.Filled. clear any others. 22 In the Name dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 3. enter 12. click Duplicate. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Custom. 4 On the Design Bar.

enter 6 mm. for Elevation Tag. select the current project. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display.rfa. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. For Line Weight. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. clear all others.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. enter 12. 30 On the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select 3. and click OK. select Custom-Callout Head. On the floor plan. For Dimensions ➤ Width. Click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. Click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.5 mm. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Training Files. . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 40 Press ESC. select 12. select Square. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Duplicate. For Corner Radius. 39 Click OK twice. and click Open. for Callout Tag.5mm Square. 27 Click OK twice. select the callout. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. . 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.

44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select 7. 43 Under Category. filters. view regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 45 For Line Pattern. and select 4. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. masking regions. expand Callout Boundary. You learn to create view templates. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 46 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Dash. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . click the Annotation Objects tab. 49 Click OK. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides.

The crop region displays as red. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. click (Show Crop Region). 5 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. and double-click East. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Zoom to Fit.rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. To accomplish this. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.

and section lines are now hidden in the view. levels. Callouts. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a View Template | 177 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. grids. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. 11 Under Visibility. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

right-click North. and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. click Apply. and click Apply View Template. and click Create View Template From View. under Elevations. click OK. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click OK. 16 In the View Templates dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.rvt. edit the crop region as before. right-click East. 15 In the New View Template dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 Using the same method. under Elevations. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 17 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser. double-click North.

Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Extents. click Edit. double-click Penthouse. 2 In the Project Browser.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . for View Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. select Level Below (Level 4). Click OK twice. Under View Depth. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.rvt.

for View Range. select Roof Plan. double-click Roof Plan. Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click. for Bottom. select Level 4. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. under Extents. select Level 4.

Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for Level.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Move you cursor diagonally. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. click Edit. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 10 On the Design Bar. click Lines. In the left corner of the building. for View Range. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. under Extents. select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region.

and double-click Level 1. in this case. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.17 On the Design Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. After you apply the filter. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.rvt. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.

for Pattern. under Projection/Surface. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. under Categories. and apply a color. 17 Using the same method. for Rated Walls. enter Rated Walls. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. select Walls. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 7 In the Filters dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. select the red color. under Filters. for Color. 11 Select Rated Walls. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 In the Filters dialog. click (New). 9 Click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click Override under Patterns. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Add. Select contains. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 12 On the Filter tab. click Remove. click <No Override>. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . under Basic colors. select Solid Fill. 16 Click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. Enter Hr.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.

as shown. and click Rename. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 8 Select the crop region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 On the View menu.rvt. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. right-click. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . click Masking Region. 1 In the Project Browser.

13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar.

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. 4 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Rename. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. for Color. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut. under Visibility. 1 In the Project Browser. click <No Override> to apply a color.Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Pattern.rvt. select Walls. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. click in the Patterns field. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Override. click black. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. select Solid fill. click the current scale. and click 1: 50. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.

188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors. clear Grids. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. By using the previous method to make the selection. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. for Color. for Pattern. click Projection Lines. 25 Click OK twice. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select Dash. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the sofa. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click <No Override> to apply a color.20 Right-click. click a purple color. under Lines. and click OK. right-click.

Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. right-click. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click . click Modify. 29 In the Color dialog. select a bright green color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 32 Select one of the lamps. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice.28 For Color. click By Category Override.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.rvt. and click OK. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. right-click. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.Creating Sheets. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Sheet. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select A0 metric.

and select the title block. Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter Site Plan. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Name. on the Options Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). 7 On the Design Bar. enter A101. For Sheet Number. 3 In the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 When the title block highlights. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101.

2009. enter For Approval. enter 15 May. for Project Address. under Other. The new project information displays in the titleblock. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 14 Click OK. enter 2009-1. For Project Status. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Smith. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Name. For Project Number. For Client Name. click Edit. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.

rvt. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Layout Plan A104 . and click Rename. you add views to these sheets. 17 In the Project Browser. for Name. right-click. and click Save. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A107 . enter Floor Plan.Elevations A105 . select A0 metric. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Sections A108 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Elevations A106 . select the new sheet name. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . click Modify. and click to place the view. double-click A102 . 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. select Level 1. double-click A104 .rvt. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet.Floor Plan. The red border around the view no longer displays.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Elevations. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Design Bar.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 8 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). double-click A107 .Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

zoom in to the grip. for View Scale. and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. . select 1:5. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.

Stairs. under Sheets (all). 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and click to place it. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 18 Under Floor Plans.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and click Activate View. In order to do this. 2 Select the building section view. double-click A107 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.Sections. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 16700 mm. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. under Sheets (all). 5 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and then make changes and deactivate the view.

8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a title sheet for your drawing set.rvt. After you create the sheet. double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 In the Project Browser. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

right-click. enter T. click Camera. and click Properties. For Sheet Name. 7 Place the camera as shown. under Floor Plans. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. The camera view displays. double-click Level 1. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name.

204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. double-click T . For Target Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 1500 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. enter 18000 mm. Under Camera. for Eye Elevation. Under Extents. 12 On the View Control Bar.Title Sheet. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. For Far Clip Offset. enter 100000 mm.

click Size. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. . Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK.15 With the view selected. click Duplicate. Under Model Crop Size. for Show title. click Modify. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. for Height. Click Apply. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 22 In the Name dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify. enter 635 mm. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 24 Click OK twice. on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. under Graphics. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). and then click OK. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan.Level 1. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. click Training Files. Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. such as doors and windows. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as room and window schedules. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 207 . Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.rvt. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . as shown: 5 Using the same method. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. click Room Separation.

9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click it. type 2400 mm. click OK. click Modify. click Training Files. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 14 For Offset.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and click to place the room and tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and select the room tag. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. type U18-1. click Room. indicating that it can be edited.rfa. The room tag number displays in blue.

and press ENTER. 23 Using the same method. 22 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. type Entry. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. and press ENTER. Dining. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. place rooms and tags. click Room.18 Click the room text label. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Click to place the new room and tag.

27 On the Design Bar. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. expand Lines. and moving clockwise.Level 2. clear Room Separation. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 29 On the Design Bar.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. but they need to be tagged. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click Room Tag. The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. clear Leader. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 11 Using the same method. for room 101. type Storage. For 103. click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 104. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for Name. type Corridor. and press ENTER. select Corridor. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . For 102. 10 Edit the number to be 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. select Storage. type Building Entry. add 5 more rooms. The room Number is U17-46. For 105. next to Rows.

232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the Lines field. click Override. 4 Click OK twice. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Custom colors. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Visibility. expand Lines. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and modify room names. under Projection/Surface. select 9. For Room Separation. 13 Save the file.rvt. and press ENTER. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch. type Stair. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK.■ For 106. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Color field. For Weight. click the Lines field. double-click Level 1. you add room separation lines. under Floor Plans.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. First. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Room Separation.

select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 13 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. for Room.

place the following rooms. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. 16 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Floor Plans. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Room Schedule.

Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Floor Finish. click Modify. 31 For Key Name. select Rooms. while pressing CTRL. 27 Select Schedule keys. click 23 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and Wall Finish. under Category. and click OK. select Base Finish.21 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. and click Add. under Available fields. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type As Selected. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. click New. (Element Properties). and for all 3 finishes. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. type Units. for Rows. 24 Open the Room Schedule.

click (Filter Selection). 37 Open the Room Schedule. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. click Edit. and click OK. double-click Level 1. 33 In the Project Browser.32 Using the same method. for Available fields. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . and click Properties. right-click Room Schedule. and click Add. for Fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 36 Click OK twice. select Rooms. for Room Style. under Identity Data. under Schedules/Quantities. under Other. 38 Under U17-8. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. select Units. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 44 On the Options Bar. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. for Room Style. click (Element Properties). All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Style. 43 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. click OK. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 5 For Title. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes.46 Open the Room Schedule. 103. and 106. For rooms 102 and 105. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. for Name. type Room Type. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. for Color. and apply it to the Level 1 view. select Public. 48 Save the file. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and click Properties. under Views (all). select Room Style. (Duplicate). Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. at the warning prompt. and double-click Level 1.rvt. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. select Service. click the Color Scheme field. click OK. 104.

click Edit Color Scheme. click the value in the Color column. click Edit. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). select the color legend. select Room Type. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. clear Visible. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Visibility. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . and clear Room Separation. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK twice. expand Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Schemes.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and click OK.

under Graphics. select blue. under Custom color. 29 Click OK twice. 24 Click OK. and click OK. (Element Properties). 27 In the Type Properties dialog. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. on the Options Bar. 28 Under Title Text. for Size. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . respectively. type 5 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. click Edit/New. for Swatch Width. type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog.

Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. under Sections. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. click Color Scheme Legend. under Visibility. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . right-click Building Section. 35 Click OK twice. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. for Color Scheme. select Room Type. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. and select Properties. and click OK. double-click Building Section. under Sections. under Graphics. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Public. click . and click OK. and click OK. 46 Click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. 41 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Rooms. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click OK. select Units. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data.

under Identity Data. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. type Suites. select Service. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. for Rows. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. for Room Style. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. click New. 51 On the Options Bar. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. and click . excluding the stairwell spaces. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 .

58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . under Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. The color fill will extend to the roof. and click OK. select Areas and Volumes. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. for Room Style. but not beyond it. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Identity Data. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. The color fill extends to the roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Suites. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that At wall finish is selected.

type -254 mm. 68 Click . under Constraints. select Level 2. select Loft. 70 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level.0. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. the dining room. and the living room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 72 On the Design Bar. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 66 Click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. type 0. 71 Click OK. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. .

double-click {3D}.73 Save the file. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Family and Type. click Modify. Select Grand totals. and click OK. select Material: Description. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Roofs. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. click Family and Type. under Category. and click Add. 4 In the Type Selector.Insulation on Plywood Deck . For Then by. 3 While pressing CTRL. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Available fields. 9 Using the same method. 5 On the Design Bar. Clear Itemize every instance. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.EPDM.

type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 23 For Field formatting. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 19 For Type. click Estimated Cost. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click the Formatting tab. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Fields. click Edit. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Material: Area. type Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. under Other. for Name. 21 Click OK.40 50. 12 Click OK. under Available fields. and under Fields. select Material: Cost. select Currency. select Calculate totals. 20 For Formula. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. for Material: Cost. and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and click Properties.

you create a shared parameter file. 27 In the Format dialog. You draw a travel path line. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. The cost fields are formatted correctly. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. not just for currency. you create an exiting plan for the building. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Digit grouping. which inserts commas after every three digits. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. tag the line. either within family components or within the project template. 29 Select Use digit grouping. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. can be used for any number-based parameter. 30 Click OK twice. and are defined and stored in an external file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. click the Format value. and schedule the total distance of each path. regardless of category. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 28 For Unit symbol. and reporting the shared parameters. 31 Save the file. select $. These shared parameters can be added to any family. for Rounding. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. adding the shared parameters to a family. In this lesson. for Currency. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 .

NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. select Length. for Name. type Exiting. type Path ID. for Type of Parameter. 7 Under Parameters. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for File name. and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. click New.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Parameters. click Training Files. click Training Files. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Create. click New. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 11 Click OK twice.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. and click Save. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Name. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Groups. under Floor Plans. type Travel Distance.

under Parameter Type. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. click Family Types. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. click Load into Projects. and click Select.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Add. 13 Click Apply. select Shared parameter. for Travel Distance Formula. and click OK. and click OK. click Add. and click OK. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. select Constraints. in the Load into Projects dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and select Instance. type Length. 11 Click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 9 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. 8 Select Instance.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 If necessary. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . group it under Dimensions. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.rfa. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Using the same method. If you have multiple projects open. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.

24 Click OK twice.rft.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and click OK. click parameter(s) to label). click Label. click Training Files. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Select. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. click Label. select Travel Distance. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click (Add Parameter). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

type M_Travel Distance Tag. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Load into Projects.rvt is selected. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 33 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file. and press DELETE. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. 29 In the drawing window. click Modify. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rfa. and move it down.28 On the Design Bar. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. for File Name. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click Save.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan . click Component. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. above the exterior door as shown. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click in the center of the corridor. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 4 On the Options Bar.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Placing. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . After the lines are tagged. under Floor Plans.Level 1. select Chain.

click Modify. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. click Modify. clear Leader. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 While pressing CTRL. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Move the cursor down. for Path ID. type 1-1.Level 2.Tagging. and click (Element Properties). double click Exiting Plan . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Component. and click outside of the building. verify that Chain is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. through the door. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.

and click. 21 On the Design Bar. click Component. and click in the stair. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. move the cursor to the left. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type Level 1 Exit Distance. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.Tagging. 33 For Name.24 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. for Path ID. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . . under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Using the same method. and click OK. Placing.

and click Add. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. for Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by. type 2-. and click Properties. 36 For Filter by. and click Rename. select Path ID. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 42 Click OK. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 35 Click the Filter tab. and under Field formatting. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and in the third field. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID.rvt. while pressing CTRL. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Edit. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 49 Click OK twice. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the third field. under Other. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. in the second field. type 1-. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. select contains.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 50 Save the file. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. type Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. under Available fields. select Travel Distance. 41 Under Fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Filter. in the first field. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 46 In the Project Browser. select Path ID and Travel Distance.

Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Interiors ➤ C10 .Fixed Partitions. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. click the Value field. select Walls. expand C . click Schedule/Quantities. right-click the Design Bar.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 10 In the schedule. 9 Click OK twice. under Identity Data. for Assembly Code. under Categories. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Partitions . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . right-click Generic . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select the following fields. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.152 mm. and select C1010145 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Properties. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. click the Fields tab. and click . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click View.

260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . the database display may be different than that shown. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. click Training Files. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 6 Click Finish. click Create. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click OK. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.mdb.mdb). for Database Name. type Revit_Project. 8 In the New Database dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click the File Data Source tab. 9 Under Directories. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.rvt. and click OK to create the database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 1 On the File menu. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. select a location for the database file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Next. under Database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.

Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. For example. Additionally. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 13 Close the exercise file. in addition to the Id column. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.

262 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. 263 .Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. plywood. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. 297 . In order to detail from the building model. like a standard door header condition. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. These components display at the required scale. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In the callout view. you trace over the building model geometry. add detail components. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009.

Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. They are also view specific. click Training Files. 5 In the alert dialog. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and click Open. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. as well as detail lines. 7 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You load detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. double-click the detail callout head. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. region objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. The roof overhang detail displays. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. you detail the view of the roof edge. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. which means that all detail components. click Training Files. and insulation objects. Exact location is not important. After you add components. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select As underlay.rvt. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.8 Delete the component. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the drawing area. for Pattern ➤ Detail. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify. enter 406. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Repeating Detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail.5mm. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 Click OK twice. Detailing the View | 299 . click Duplicate. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 15 For Spacing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

rfa. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Detail Component. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click (Move). 24 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. click Training Files. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component.

and place it in the detail view as shown. 31 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 29 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Training Files. press SPACEBAR 3 times. Detailing the View | 301 . 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.Because you still have several components to load. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Selector. 30 In the Type Selector.

38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify.

43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. enter 140mm. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Detailing the View | 303 . Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. select to near side. ■ Click Modify. For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown.

meaning they display only in this view. 47 In the Type Selector. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and lock the component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. you add lines to your detail. 51 Click Modify.45 In the Type Selector. as shown. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Like detail components.rvt. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. they are view specific. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Medium Lines. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. and press ENTER. select Thin Lines. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 305 .4 Click Modify. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. as shown. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. enter 10mm.

as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

select Do not display. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw the detail lines as shown. and click Properties. enter 10mm. When you turn the display model off. Click (Pick Lines). under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. select the Penthouse level line. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and press ENTER. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 26 In the Type Selector. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. right-click.18 In the Type Selector. select Vapor Barrier. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For Offset. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.

press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 Click Modify.

6 Click Modify. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Enter the text. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.rvt. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click again to specify the location of the text box.

select a text note. click Select All Instances. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. Creating Detail Components on page 310. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Options Bar. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail . right-click. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. (Filter Selection). and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. for Suffix. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . right-click. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. and press DELETE. and click the dimension text.rvt. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click. and save the exercise file. enter Typ. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. under Text Fields. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog.7 Select the dimension line.Keynotes. and click OK.. clear Detail Items and Dimensions.

pressing TAB. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select all the coping linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. and click Open. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.7 Click Modify. and selecting the chain. in the Type Selector. while pressing CTRL.rft. click Training Files. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. select Medium Lines. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 16 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 311 .

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The original linework remains selected. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . Adding Keynotes on page 312. 31 Using the same method used previously.rfa. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. delete the underlying linework.18 In the Save As dialog. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. and the component can be placed in the detail. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and click Save. 21 To place the component. 27 On the Design Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 26 Press DELETE. enter Roof Edge. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. click Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog. 23 Using a window. for File name. 28 On the Options Bar. click Load. 30 In the drawing area. clear Detail Items. you place keynotes on objects. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. While pressing SHIFT. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to your preferred location. 22 Click Modify. click Training Files. and click Open. click Load into Projects. and click OK. click Detail Component.Keynotes view is not the open view. select the coping. 24 On the Options Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser.

rfa.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Click to place the leader arm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.D11. 6 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Adding Keynotes | 313 . click Training Files. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. Roof Edge4.rvt. For the metal coping. 19mm Plywood.B5. 2 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Edit/New. In the Keynotes dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06160. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Keynote ➤ Element. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. and click OK.C1. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. use keynote 07645. (Element Properties).

13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 06110.D1.A8. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. You do this in order to keynote the component.20 Ga. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314.I1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.D11. use keynote 06110. using keynote 07460. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . use keynote 09250.F1. and click . For the 50 x 200. click Keynote ➤ Element.9 In the Type Properties dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.G1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 11 Click OK 3 times. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 15 In the Type Selector. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Corrugated Metal. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 17 Keynote the component. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. click Detail Component. FasciaProfile_1. 12 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 300. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06110.F1. For the 50 x 150. click in the Value column. navigate to 07645. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 18 Save the file.

rft. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the Name dialog. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Save. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. 11 Press DELETE. 9 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select Medium Lines. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 20 Click OK 3 times. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and select the right end point. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 6 Lock the line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Modify. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Edit/New. for File name. 22 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. click Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. click Load into Projects. and click (Element Properties). and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Load. 16 Select the component. and click Open. 15 Click Modify. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. select the left end point of the reference line. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. and click Open. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 46 Click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 30 Click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click the lower end at the break line. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. name the component Air Barrier. click Edit/New. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. against the 19mm plywood. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. enter EPDM Membrane. 47 Select the component. 49 With the component selected. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. invisible. 48 Using the same method used previously. 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and hidden) used in the view. 42 Using the same method used previously. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 29 In the drawing area.G1. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Detail Component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog.A1. and click . 36 In the Keynotes dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click OK. 41 Select the component just added. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. and click . and assign it keynote 06110. 38 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. and click . 34 In the Name dialog.A5. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click in the Value column. and click . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.25 Next. 31 Select the component.

click Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 52 In the Type Selector. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

50 x 200 Framing. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . in the Type Selector. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines. click Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. 60 On the Design Bar. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.A4. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Load into Projects. select the component. 68 In the drawing area. name the component Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier.58 Using the method used previously. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 67 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260.rfa.

70 Using the method used previously. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. The database file opens in a text editor. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and assign it keynote 07210. 71 In the drawing area. and click .rvt. and close the text editor.txt. 72 Save the file. 3 In the text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Enter 07463.69 Select the component.A4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and press TAB. click Browse.A9. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. name the component Batt Insul. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and press ENTER. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Enter 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. add a keynote for the component. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A1. under Keynote Table. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and press TAB.. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.

12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.A1. 13 Click Modify. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 9 In the drawing area.txt. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Each keynote displays as a simple number. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 11 Click Modify. navigate to 07463. 14 Save the file. under Path Type. select Absolute. and click OK. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and click to place the note. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click to place the leader. and click Open. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select all the keynotes. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. After you create a drafting view. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. click Keynote ➤ Element. In the Type Selector. These details do not update with changes to the building model.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. For Colors. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. and click Rename.rvt.Center to Center is selected. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. right-click Drafting 1.rvt. verify that Auto . for Scale. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Black and White. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .dwg. and click OK. select 1 : 5. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). The detail that you import is in DWG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Positioning. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Click Open. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click Properties. and click OK. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. enter Detail . 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 12 Click OK twice. 10 In the Rename dialog. 5 Click Modify. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. click Rename. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 3 On the Options Bar.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. 6 Select the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). delete the existing value. select Reference other view. click Callout. for New.

under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Det. and double-click the callout.No Reference). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.Elev. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click A105 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Save the file. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Sect. click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .

select Gypsum-Plaster. click Region Properties. 14 Click OK 3 times. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. Board. 3 On the View Control Bar. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. for Name. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar.rvt. 11 In the Name dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 5 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Filled Region. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. . 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

17 Click Modify. Draw a rectangle as shown.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the width dimension. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 19 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 20 On the Design Bar. and enter 20. click 22 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 18 While pressing CTRL. select the left and bottom edges of the region.5mm. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). click .

click Edit/New. 30 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Move the cursor up. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. for Name. 25 Click Modify. . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. and click OK. 24 Select the mirrored region. select Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.Finish. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate.

click Finish Sketch. in the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .5mm. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 39 In the Type Selector. 38 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. verify that the thickness is 19mm. click (Rectangle). verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. 37 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. sketch the new region as shown. click Filled Region. click (Align). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click .

For Offset. (Align). click Finish Sketch. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.42 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Ref Plane. enter 6mm. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. For Offset. click 48 Click Modify. enter 10mm. click Filled Region. and press ENTER. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

Move the cursor down 305mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line. Move the cursor right 25mm. and press ENTER. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 56 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain. For Offset. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. enter 0.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw).

65 On the Options Bar.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. 58 In the Type Selector.rfa. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt. click Load. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 68 Click Modify. and right edges of the door panel region. enter 3mm.2mm. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Component. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. For Offset. enter 76. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. top. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and click Open. 62 Select the left detail line. 61 Click Modify. select the height dimension.

click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 76 In the Type Selector. and click Open. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Detail Component. click Detail Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.70 On the Design Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. click Training Files. use the images as a guide. 71 On the Options Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 87 Click Modify.78 On the Design Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. select Thin Lines. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. click . 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

89 On the Design Bar.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . and on the Edit toolbar. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. click Detail Lines. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror).

enter 3mm. 95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 97 On the Options Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select M_Break Line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector. select the length dimension. click Detail Lines. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click . 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. 101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 99 Click Modify.

select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 108 In the Type Selector. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 107 On the Design Bar.5mm Arial. click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip. click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 110 Select the dimension line.

select Replace With Text. click Dimension. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.2. and click the dimension text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. under Dimension Value. under Dimension Value. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and then click the dimension text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. enter See Schedule. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 113 Under Text Fields.5mmArial. select Replace With Text. and enter Varies. for Below. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 114 Click OK.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 118 Select Modify to end the command.

and click to place the text. click to create an arced leader. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. 123 Click OK.121 Click OK. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. select the gypsum board region on the left. click Text. and click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 127 Enter Gyp. 128 Select the note. 125 In the Options Bar. 126 In the drawing area.

131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command.

and double-click East. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.rvt. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 339 .

click Modify. for Number of Leaders.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Hexagon. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 5 On the Options Bar. type 1.rfa. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. click Training Files. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 8 Select the keynote. 7 On the Design Bar.

click (Copy).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy. for Text. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select the tag.

click (Element Properties). on the Edit toolbar. type B. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. and on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. 18 Using the same method. 17 Click OK. type Repair existing door surround. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. (Mirror). click Copy.14 With the copy selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. and click. 15 For Text. 19 With the tag selected.

Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Repair existing door surround. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. using the table as a reference. 22 Optionally. Remove all existing windows. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . and moving counter-clockwise. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

26 Click OK. type Description. and click Add. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 27 In the column header (text). and double-click A103 . expand Schedules/Quantities. for the value. select Exterior Construction Notes. for Note block name. 29 In the Project Browser. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and for Alignment. Select Text. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. type Mark. for Header text. On the Appearance tab. under Available fields. select Tag. select Center. for Heading. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). Create. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag it to the sheet. type 6 mm. On the Formatting tab. and select Bold. type Exterior Construction Notes. and click Add. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Tag. for Sort by. 24 In the New Note Block dialog.Elevations. format.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 28 In the Project Browser. verify that Arial is selected.

rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. under Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.Title Sheet. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

Select Sheet Name. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Add. ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Index. and drag it to the sheet. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. for Sort by. under Sheets (all). 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 5 In the list title field. select does not equal. and click Add. in the second field.Title Sheet. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Filter tab. double-click T . for Filter by. under Available fields. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. and in the third field. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the first field. The drawing list displays. type T.

and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. windows. For the text. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Training File Using Legends | 347 . door frame schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. click Modify. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents. Finally.9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file. and door frames. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. doors.

8 In the Type Properties dialog. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. click Symbol. 10 For Text Size. 6 On the Options Bar. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Arial.rvt.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . type Typical Symbol Legend. type Legend Text. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Duplicate. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click OK. click Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Open Level Head . and click OK twice. type 3mm. 9 For Text Font. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. click Edit/New.

Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Legends. and for Leader. and click to place it. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 14 Working from the top down. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and double-click A101 . type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.

and click to place it. 21 In the Type Selector.Unit 18. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click A102 . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 19 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 22 On the Design Bar.17 In the Type Selector. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.

Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select 1 : 50. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 3 For Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. and press ENTER. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . click Legend Component. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 5 On the View Control Bar. For View. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For Host length. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Medium for Detail Level. type 900 mm. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Section. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.

click Text. for Family. for Leader. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader. and on the Options Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. right-click Sheets (all). and click New Sheet. 19 Type the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Project Browser. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating a Component Legend | 353 .Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock.

select 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify to end the command. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click Level 4. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Floor Plans. The open drawings are both visible.25 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet.

zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). 35 On the View Control Bar.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 Select the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.

unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. under Floor Plans. These changes can be due to owner requests. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. contractor inquiries. In this exercise. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.rvt. or changes in building material availability.36 Optionally. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Using the table. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can create a sequence of revisions. click 37 Save the file.

verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revision is locked and issued to the field. For example. 5 For Description. yet as concise as possible. When Issued is selected. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. for Numbering. If you select Per Sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Show. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. if the active revision is number 1. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If Visible is not selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In most instances. type a date.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In general. verify that Per Project is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When you use this option.

5 Select the divider. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you make changes to the project floor plan. click (Move). 9 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. click Modify. 3 Select the divider. 6 On the Design Bar. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. 4 On the Edit toolbar. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Revision clouds have read-only properties. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. select Snaps Off. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. In the Snaps dialog. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Revision Cloud. and click OK. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. select 6. for Line Weight.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. click the Annotation Objects tab. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. you load a revision tag into the project. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 16 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 17 Save the file. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 6 Click Load.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 In the Tags dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click OK. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions In this exercise. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. 10 In the drawing area.rfa. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. click Tags. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table. double-click Level 4. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. select Leader. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click to place the tag. 8 In the Tags dialog. Because you chose to number by project. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 12 Save the file. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . under Floor Plans.

362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. type Modify Paving Area. select Issued. and enter a date for the revision. 7 For Description. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you prevent further changes to the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. double-click A107 . View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. You do this by issuing the revision.Unnamed. with the description Relocate Door. and click OK. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and enter a date. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 8 Add another revision row. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Add. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. NOTE After you issue a revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. under Sheets. you can no longer modify it. 9 Click OK.

Relocate Door to the revision cloud. double-click A107 . click to add a revision clouds. for Revision. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 10 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Revision Cloud. select Seq. apply Seq. 19 To add tags. 11 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Modify Paving Area. 15 On the Options Bar. in the drawing area. double-click Level 4. 12 In the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. select the revision cloud. select Tag ➤ By Category. under Sheets (all).Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet.Unnamed. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Floor Plans. 3 . 17 Using the same method learned previously. 2 . Working with Revisions | 363 .

for Sequence. you edit the titleblock family. For each revision.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You do this so that the revision can be changed. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. 26 In the drawing area. beginning with "D". The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. height. select Alphabetic. 25 Click OK twice. and rotation) to the revision schedule. clear Issued. Click Options. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. delete the first 3 characters. select the titleblock. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. for Numbering. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Edit. click Yes. for Appearance. Select Outline. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 34 On the Design Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and click Properties. and drag it above the schedule area. click Yes. and press DELETE. 33 Select the schedule header. under Other. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area.27 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Edit Family. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 28 In the alert dialog. for Build Schedule. Select Grid lines. Clear Blank row before data. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. select Bottom-up. click Load into Projects. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules.

the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. enter Rev. select User defined. right-click Revision Schedule.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and on the Options Bar. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Heading. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. open the titleblock family for editing. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Rotation on Sheet. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. click Edit. select the revision schedule. 45 On the Appearance tab. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. and click Properties. under Other. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Select the revision schedule header. With a user-defined height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. When the height property is variable. for Height. for Formatting. 46 Click OK twice. and the most current revisions display in the available rows..

click Load into Projects. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. text. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file.

Title Sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and place it on a sheet. double-click T .Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. click to add text without a leader. for Leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.JPG. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click T . 5 On the Design Bar. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. under Sheets. under Sheets. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.

9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.doc text file in another window. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. with the new text box still selected. 11 Save the file. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .

JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.Unit 18. This process may vary from system to system. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.mdi.xls. click Training Files. 4 Under Printer.JPG. and click Save. 10 On the Design Bar. for File name. for Name. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. type Fixture Schedule. under Sheets. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 5 Click OK. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. This step has been completed for you. click Desktop. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. select the document writer. double-click A102 . click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project. The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. 371 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. right-click Level 2. double-click Level 2. under Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 5 Click in the drawing area. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. 6 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser.Aviary. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. click Zoom To Fit.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. for Name. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and click OK.

9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

10 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 14 Click in the drawing area. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. for Name. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. right-click Level 2. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit.

18 On the Design Bar.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Zoom To Fit. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Matchline. 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View Control Bar.

click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click.

32 In the Sheet Title dialog.Unnamed. and click OK. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. for Line Weight. and drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Aviary. and click Rename. and click OK. 28 For Line Pattern. select 9. under Floor Plans. click Level 2 . click the Annotation Objects tab. 31 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Aviary. 27 Under Matchline. right-click A101 . for Name. 33 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog.

Aviary is selected. click View Reference. under Floor Plans. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. and place the Level 2 .35 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Target view. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click Zoom To Fit. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar.Labs. for Target view.

click the far right control. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.Aviary.46 In the Project Browser. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 47 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 48 Select the crop region. under Floor Plans. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. double-click Level 2 . right-click. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 49 If. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.

and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. select all views in the list. but are not placed on sheets. right-click Level 2. and click Apply Dependent Views. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. expand Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 51 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 55 On the Zoom flyout. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 54 In the Project Browser. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.57 On the Zoom flyout. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click South Elevation. click Zoom To Fit. The matchline is already placed in the view. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. and double-click South Elevation. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

for Name.Left. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . for Name. cropping the view to the aviary. 11 Select the crop region. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 4 In the Rename View dialog.The dependent view opens. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Right. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click Rename. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . select the Crop Region. 5 In the drawing area. 9 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. enter South Elevation . right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.

click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. The perspective view displays. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. With the camera shown. as shown. and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. under Floor Plans. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View | 405 .3 Zoom out. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. If the camera is not shown in the view. and select the crop boundary. Depending on camera placement. double-click Site.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 10 Save the file. under 3D Views. enter Exterior .6 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 8 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view. 7 In the Rename View dialog.Day.

and render a daytime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Day. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. double-click Exterior . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.rvt. under 3D Views. You then duplicate the view.

select Spring Equinox. NOTE If a background image is required. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Background. You create a location and time for the rendering.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 3pm. and click Render. In this case. select Edit/New. for Setting. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. for New.Santa Monica. and click Rename. You adjust cloud settings as required. select Sky: Cloudy. 5 In the Rename dialog. enter Spring Equinox . 8 Under Quality. select Medium. click (Show Rendering Dialog). For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 6 Click OK twice.

10 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. select Portable Network Graphics (*.9 In the Rendering dialog.png). Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Show the model. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. Click Save. click Export. After the image is rendered. click Show the rendering. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.

verify that Pool Lights is selected. for Scheme. 22 Using the same method. under Ungrouped Lights. click New. for Name. for Name. under 3D Views. right-click Exterior .Night. 25 Using the same method. To select a sequential list.Flat Round : 60W . you duplicate the view and change the settings.Flat Round : 60W .120V to the Pool Lights group.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . and select the last light. click Render. and click Artificial Lights. and click Move to Group. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and click OK.Night. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click New.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . and click OK. click OK. select Exterior: Artificial only. 27 In the Rendering dialog. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. and click OK. enter Pool Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 16 With the Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar.Day. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. press and hold SHIFT.Flat Round : 60W .Day view to Exterior .Night view open.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. enter Pool House Lights. click Dialog). 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .120V. under Group Options. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Exterior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Ungrouped Lights. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Lighting. select the first light. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Group Options. dialog. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.

for Exposure Value. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. click Adjust Exposure. enter 4. and click OK. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Show the model. under Image. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. 32 Save the file. In this example. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. After the image is rendered.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

2 Zoom in to the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. select RPC Female : YinYin. click Modify. click Component. double-click Level 1. ■ (Rotate). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 6 Select the figure. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 4 In the Type Selector. the person’s line of sight. and on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . 5 On the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight.

click Edit. By default. click Modify. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. click Edit/New. 14 Save the file. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Element Properties). Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. on the Options Bar. you can enable this option. under Parameters. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 12 Click OK 3 times. 13 On the Design Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. for Render Appearance Properties.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. click Camera.rvt. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.

and click Properties. 4 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. under 3D Views. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1.The perspective view displays. and click OK. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under Extents. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click South. 9 In the Project Browser. select the section box. in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 .

size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view. right-click.12 In the floor plan view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 17 Save the file. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and curtain walls. and render the interior view. doors that contain windows or glass. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.15 Maximize the 3D view.

7 Under Quality. select Draft.rvt. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. enter Interior . under 3D Views. After these settings are established. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Pool Lights. You can specify a lower quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. for Setting. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 2 In the Rename View dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. c_Pool_House_in_progress. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. for Scheme. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. you turn them off for this scene.Night. click (Show Rendering Dialog). the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Render.

The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Day. select Spring Equinox . You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. 13 In the Rendering dialog. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. the daylight portals can be turned on. 3pm. and click Render. you must create a custom setting.Santa Monica. The preset schemes are read-only. in order to turn on daylight portals. By default they are turned off. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. but the space will receive standard daylighting. select Region. click 14 For Setting. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. For sunlit interiors. In this case. 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. right-click Interior . select Curtain Walls. for Sun. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Edit. You create a view for the interior during the day. and click OK. (Show Rendering Dialog). for Scheme. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. For more information on daylight portals.9 Close the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . for Daylight Portal Options. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior .Night.

enter 1. under Image. In the next steps. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Show the model.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and close the Rendering dialog. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog. click Properties). View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. and on the Options Bar. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. For Saturation. select the column on the right. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10.

29 In the Rendering dialog. add a bump map to create texture. select Printer.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Rotate. the render time increases significantly. Click OK. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. For Width. and click Render. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . select Unfinished. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. 23 With the column still selected. for Setting. select High. enter 5''. 30 In the drawing area. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 26 Click Update Preview. 28 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. and click OK. For Bump. For Amount. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 90. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. and on the Options Bar. under Output Settings.6. click the dimensions for Size. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select Based on wood grain. for Resolution. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Wood. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. clear Region. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. You change the varnish setting. click OK. As size and DPI are increased.

which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. In a plan view. but you can also define it in a 3D. Usually. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. elevation. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. independent of the Revit Architecture software.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. or section view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.

If you prefer to use metric values. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Floor. verify that Perspective is selected. click Training Files. and change unit formats as desired. click Settings ➤ Project Units. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Townhouse. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the tab in the context menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. proceeds through the dining room. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room.rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . for Width. on the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. 16 On the Options Bar. and for Height. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x).8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify that Field of view is selected. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 16''. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. If it is not. 17 Click . 11 Under Change. for Frame. click the dimensions for Size. select the crop boundary. 14 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 1. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 9''. 12 On the View menu. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.The walkthrough plays. press ESC. double-click 1st Floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. under Floor Plans. click (Element Properties). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. click Edit Walkthrough. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. and click OK. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. proceed to the next exercise. clear Far Clip Active. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.rvt.

7 Click the third key frame position. for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). select Path. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and drag it to the location shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration.

but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 8 If you want to save this exercise. c_Townhouse. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. double-click Walkthrough 1. for Model Graphics Style. When you export the walkthrough. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. for Frames/sec. on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. 3 Under Format. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. enter 15. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. hidden line. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. for Compressor. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click OK. specifying the number of frames. under Output Length. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. . and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save As. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. reducing the size of the image. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. shading.rvt. select <Shading>. If you are unsure of what option to use. or rendering. and save the exercise file with a unique name. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. under Walkthroughs. shading with edges. 9 To play the walkthrough. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. The walkthrough is recorded. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog.

431 . A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. In this tutorial. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.

click Camera.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Courtyard View In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (SteeringWheels). click shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans. as shown. A 3D view is created. click Training Files. 4 On the View toolbar.Creating a Solar Study .

click Section. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.5 On the Design Bar. if necessary. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. and click OK. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. expand 3D Views. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. click Modify. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.Courtyard View. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 3 On the Design Bar. enter Solar Study . under Floor Plans. 9 On the File menu.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click 01 Entry. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. right-click 3D View 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Save As.

13 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1. click . 7 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click Modify. double-click the section head. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 To view the section. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. expand Sections. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Rename. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). as shown.

click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 17 To hide the section box. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 16 On the View Control Bar.14 In the Project Browser. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 15 In the Rename View dialog. click Save. as shown. click Callout. then Fine. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. double-click 01 Entry. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. and click OK. then select Medium. In some cases. 4 In the Project Browser. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. you create a plan cutaway view. and click OK. 6 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 18 On the File menu. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 5 In the Project Browser. click . under Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. do not display many elements in 3D. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. right-click {3D}. Typical plan views. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Callout of 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. clear Section Boxes. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435.

16 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. as shown.8 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). 15 Select the Roof. 9 On the SteeringWheel. so you can see into the building from the top. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under 3D Views. 19 In the Rename View dialog. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. right-click {3D}. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and click OK.17 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . 20 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and preview the effects of each study as an animation.

7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . MA. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. click click OK. You can create a still.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. leave the slider at 50. single-day. Los Angeles. for City. CA. .Boston. or multi-day solar study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. and click Duplicate. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date range. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. USA. and time range. and time. 9 In the Name dialog. click . Click the Single-Day tab. date. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and click OK. you specify the location. select Los Angeles.Creating Solar Studies . 10 Under Place. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you specify the location. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. For the Single-Day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. For this study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 For Sun Position. For the Multi-Day solar study. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. expand Views (all). USA is selected. click . enter Summer Solstice. expand 3D Views. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

select December 22. Clear Ground Plane at Level. for Sun Position.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected.Courtyard View is currently displayed. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. and click OK. Under Frame. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . enter 20 and press ENTER. 8 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles is selected. and click OK. ■ For Time Interval. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Los Angeles. and click OK. click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2008. select Winter Solstice. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . and click Duplicate. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. under Frame. for Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER. click OK. select June 22. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. For Time Range. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. on the Single-Day tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. enter Winter Solstice. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click Save. 14 In this case. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2008. 16 In the Name dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 19 On the File menu.

12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. and click OK. click To display the next sequential frame. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Text.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. on the Single-Day tab. click . select Summer Solstice. The solar study animation plays. click . AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. . Los Angeles. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.■ To display the next key frame. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar.

approximately as shown. as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Click and enter Dining.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 8 For Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. expand 3D Views. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 5 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

clear Section Boxes. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. 15 To hide the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and click OK. if necessary. select the section box. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 Click outside of the section box. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Section Boxes. 12 In the drawing area. Los Angeles. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. and enter 5 to 50. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Frame Range. ■ For Frames per second. On the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Summer Solstice. click OK. as shown. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. under Output Length. 11 To display the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain.

For Files of Type. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. Click OK.Los Angeles. under Output Length. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. or frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. of the animation separately. click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. select Winter Solstice. To maintain the proportions of the frame. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 2 On the View Control Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For File Name. For Frames per second. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Compressor. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. verify that the value is set to 15. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . select AVI Files. enter 450 in the first field (width). 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Model Graphics Style. you open each image. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. For Dimensions. click . 3 For Sun Position. and enter 5 to 10. Los Angeles. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.■ ■ Under Format. Under Format. select Frame Range. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To view the animation.

Click OK. For File name. or GIF. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. For Files of Type. such as JPEG. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . click the Desktop icon. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. depending on the Frame Range. click Save. select PNG. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.Los Angeles. or any single-frame format. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. as shown: 9 On the File menu. In this example. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.■ For Dimensions. under 3D Views. 8 Click Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. BMP.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. TIFF. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter 450 in the first field (width). the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

MA. click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. USA. clear Section Boxes. specify 2:00 pm. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.Los Angeles . and on the View Control Bar. select One week.Week Interval. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 5 Select the roof. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. On the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . click OK. for File name enter 2pm . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. For Time. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Time Interval. for Sun Position. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate.Boston.

you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Compressor. 17 On the View Control Bar. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. click OK.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you mirror a project. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Click the Desktop icon. and click OK.West or North . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). for File Name. model views. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. and click Save. under Floor Plans.South. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and annotations in non-drafting views. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. such as East . you mirror all model elements. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. In the Length/Format dialog. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry.

For additional information. 5 In the warning dialog.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. The project is mirrored along the East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Then.West axis. 6 On the Standard toolbar. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. select East . 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select the roof.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. and click OK. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. click OK. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. In this exercise. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process.West. 2 In the drawing area.

and select Winter Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. 8 For Sun Position. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 12 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. specify 11:00 AM for time. click Apply. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . and click OK. and click OK. click . For example. click . click the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 449 . on the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the View Control Bar.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click the Still tab. select True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 15 For Sun Position. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and click Properties. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. When a project is started. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. right click 01 Entry. the view settings must be set for True North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 19 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. under Floor Plans. click . click OK. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Orientation. 18 In the Project Browser. and select Winter Solstice.

Orienting to True North | 451 . click toward the top of the screen. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

select True North Orientation. select Summer Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Rename. right-click. for Orientation. and click Apply. right-click 01 Entry. and click Properties. enter True North Orientation. 25 In the Project Browser.23 In the Project Browser. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. for Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar. select True North. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 For Sun Position. 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Element Properties. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. click the Still tab. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. click . 27 In the Rename View dialog. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Project North.

Orienting to True North | 453 . for Compressor. click OK. click the Single-Day tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Click Save. For File Name. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. click the Desktop icon.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Files of Type. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. Los Angeles. verify that AVI Files is selected. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Dimensions. In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. Click OK. click Summer Solstice. under Format. enter 600 in the first field.

and exporting it as a JPEG image. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Since a rendered image is temporary. and click OK. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. under 3D Views. select Interior: Sun only. under Settings. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. under 3D Views. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. select 12/22. and click OK. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In this exercise.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Under Lighting. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. for Setting. 2 In the Project Browser. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. capturing it. for Date and Time. under Quality. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. (Show Rendering Dialog). Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. for Scheme. In the Name dialog. click Render.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select Medium. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and 2:00 PM. select Winter Solstice. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. select Edit/New. 3 On the View Control Bar. For Sun. This would include some exterior views and most interior views.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click Save. enter living area_winter solstice. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. click Desktop. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. click Save to Project. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Export. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 7 In the Save To Project dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK.

456 .

however. you explore the stylistic approach. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. elevations. a consultant. advanced model graphics. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Other tools in the software. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. In this series of exercises. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. For the realistic approach. you can choose between realism and stylistics. When organizing presentation graphics. length. 457 . type. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. and section boxes. and details. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Using the pre-built building model. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Co-house. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. They include rendering. linework. an outside reviewer.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. or the client. In this tutorial. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. sections.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst.rvt.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. exit the menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . 2 In the Project Browser. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

This turns off the visibility of all tags. and clear DOWN Text. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. this represents the view getting smaller. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. No annotations display in the view. 11 In the Save As directory. click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. and click Save. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. sections. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Down Arrow. and other annotations in this view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. UP Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. elevations.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 Under Visibility. and Up Arrow. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. dimensions. expand the Stairs category.

3 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. 2 On the View Control Bar. the darker the shadows. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 Under Settings. click . select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. At that place. NOTE For this step. however. 12 Click OK. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. click the Place tab. double-click it in the Project Browser. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. select By Date. 1:00 PM. click OK. MA. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. If you select a different city. modify. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. you can create.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Time and Place. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. you can select any city. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. and select 1st Flr.rvt. For Sun Position. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. Within a project. 9 For City. The higher the number. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. select Boston. specify 10/27. click (Shadows Off). click . on the Still tab. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Cnst. ■ For Contrast. 7 For Place.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. for Sun Position. click (Shadows On). . 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles.

select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . and click View. The viewport displays at the cursor. and click to place it. 4 In the Views dialog. click Add View. click Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click the Design Bar. and notice the view title. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Modify.

for Show Title. For this analytique. and click OK. click Duplicate. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. select No.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click Activate View. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. click . enter Presentation. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 9 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this.

click . 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and the boundary of the region. select Invisible lines. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 22 On the Design Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 18 On the Options Bar. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. If necessary. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. When you finish drawing the chain. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Edit/New. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. fill properties. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select Chain. click Filled Region. click Region Properties.

and click OK. click Duplicate. under Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK. select Solid fill. and click View Properties. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. click . under Identity Data. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Sheet Name. scroll down. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Finish Sketch. enter Presentation. for Fill Pattern. under Graphics. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. enter Solid Black. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

click . and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation South Elevation. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. exit the menu. right-click Copy of South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click OK. under Settings. Time and Place. and click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click Override. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Shadows Off). 14 For Sun Position. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click Duplicate. specify 2:30 PM. 13 For Contrast. 16 In the Name dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.2 In the Project Browser. select By Date. and click Rename. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. By changing the angle of the sun. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click in the Walls row. 9 Click OK. clear Visible. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. expand the Doors category. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. specify 35. under Visibility. under Elevations. 18 For Time. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click in the drawing area. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under Visibility. scroll up. 12 Under Shadow. and clear Elevation Swing. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Pattern Overrides. select Cast Shadows.

select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Presentation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Add View. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. 3 In the Views dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 7 On the Design Bar. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.

select 1: 100. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Section. Cnst. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. under Floor Plans. for Scale. double-click 1st Flr. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. 3 On the Options Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

as shown. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. To fit correctly in the analytique.Section 2 is added to the building model. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . this view needs to be rotated 180°. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1 : 100. To accomplish this. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. and double-click Section 2.

and click Rename. expand the Doors category. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 17 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Presentation Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Visible.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click the Model Categories tab. click Override. scroll up. click in the Walls row. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click OK. right-click Callout of Section 2.

(Hide Crop Region). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 20 Click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. click The crop regions no longer display. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 22 On the View Control Bar. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. When you select the crop region.

3 On the View Control Bar. The shadows do not offer much contrast. under Sections (Callout 1). select Cast Shadows.rvt.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. specify 35. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. in the Project Browser. ■ For Sun Position. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click Apply. In the steps that follow. 6 In the Name dialog. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. In addition.

TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. for Silhouette style. Silhouette Edges. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. NOTE The line style. select Silhouette Edges. specify 70°. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). For Altitude.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Click OK. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. was added to this training file for training purposes. For Azimuth. click OK. Select Relative to View. and click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. select Directly. specify 135°. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.

rvt. and click to place the selected view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View.Presentation.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 3 In the Views dialog. under Sheets (all). 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 .

under Sections (Callout 1). The section needs to be rotated 180°. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate).5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. To rotate an object. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. The view title no longer displays. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . double-click Section 2. you click to specify the start radius. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference.

Presentation. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all). The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The callout rotates 180°.

14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.

double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 7 In the Rename View dialog. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Type 1). 3 In the New View Template dialog. right-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click OK. and click Rename.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the View Templates dialog. enter Presentation Section 1.rvt. and click OK. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

select Viewport : Presentation. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 In the Type Selector. select Presentation. 15 Right-click the viewport.Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 18 Right-click the viewport. under Names. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Graphics. annotations. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. click Add View. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . The furniture.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. select 90° Counterclockwise. lighting fixtures. double-click A105 . for Rotation on Sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. and click OK.

such as a tracery window or a column capital. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

under Sections (Callout 1). Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1).rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the callout. click Callout. and click Rename. double-click Section 1.

and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 8 Right-click.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the crop region. and click OK. and click View Properties. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. clear Annotation Crop.

For Scale Value 1. and click Activate View. select Custom. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.Presentation. double-click A105 . 15 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. Click OK.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Add View. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Section: Presentation Callout. specify 22.

NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click Deactivate View. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. When finished. click Region Properties. In the steps that follow. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Presentation Callout. activate the viewport. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. and make adjustments as necessary. under Sections (Callout 1).

sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. When you are finished. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . click Finish Sketch. on the Design Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. double-click A105 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. and click Activate View. click . 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK 3 times. select Solid fill. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. for Fill Pattern.Presentation. under Sheets (all).

and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 32 On the Design Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click . 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and sketch the rectangle shown below.31 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the crop region.

36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View. click (Hide Crop Region).

2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click 1 : 200. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under 3D Views. click the Scale control. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Isometric. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and apply shadows to the views. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 .6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. specify 45°. under Extents. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. in the list. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Rename View dialog. A section box displays around the building model. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. enter Isometric 1. specify 135°. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. click . 8 In the Name dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click Rename. under 3D Views. select Section Box. Select 1st Flr. under 3D Views. For Contrast. For Sun Position. For Azimuth. select Directly. 13 In the Project Browser. for Silhouette style. select Cast Shadows. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 In the Rename View dialog. click Duplicate. select Silhouette Edges. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. Cnst. For Altitude. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. right-click Isometric 1. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Select Relative to View. specify 35. enter Isometric 2. right-click Isometric. under 3D Views. and click OK.

19 Select the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. You can use this to rotate the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. as shown. When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. The section box no longer displays. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Isometric 3. On the Annotation Categories tab. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. If desired. 24 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. you can adjust the plane location. When you are finished. double-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. under Sheets (all). and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 25 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify on the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. right-click Isometric 2. 27 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. 23 In the Rename View dialog. In the Type Selector. Next. 29 To hide the section box. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. the stairs and railings may display. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. make a copy of the view.Presentation. under 3D Views.

32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 33 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation.

and click Activate View. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. 39 For Background. click Region Properties. 40 Click OK twice. 41 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. for Fill Patterns. The image below shows the redrawn lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . select Transparent. 42 Using the drawing tools. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Edit/New. On the Options Bar. click Lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Concrete. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. This will make it easier to draw lines.

48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit/New. select Solid fill. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 50 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Region Properties.43 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Click OK twice.

click Camera. double-click 1st Flr. you create the final view for the analytique. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. under Floor Plans. a cutaway perspective view. then you specify the eye direction and range. you add it to the presentation sheet. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The view opens immediately. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 .

Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click OK. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. select Cast Shadows. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). specify the following: Under Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. click . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Sun Position.

select Section Box. 12 Select the section box. Grips display on each plane of the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. click Size. select Viewport : Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Change. click (Hide Crop Region). and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. you must specify the actual size of the image. 19 To hide the section box. and click OK. and click OK. for Width. under Sheets (all). 17 Under Model Crop Size. double-click A105 . 18 On the View Control Bar.14 Select the crop region. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 165 mm.

12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click it in the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. select a font. select Text : Title. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 6 In the Name dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . click Edit/New. click Edit/New. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Description. and click OK. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the same font as the title. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 10 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. under Text. specify a text size of 40 mm. click . Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click OK. enter Title. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text.

17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the Design Bar. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

curtain walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. you create a small building from the front mass form. In this tutorial. and roofs. such as walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. 507 . that compose the building. you can easily add detail with Revit components. Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model.

For Files of type. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. Double-click the Common folder. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter SketchUp Model. buildings. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Template file. For Colors. 10 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select SketchUp Files.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 9 In the informational dialog. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. For Layers. Click the Sketchup file. and not in the library. enter Import SketchUp. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Preserve. visible elements. and click Save. For Import units. you create a Revit Architecture project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. select All. click Browse. select Auto-Detect. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. click Create Mass. 2 In the New Project dialog. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click OK. 6 In the Save As dialog.skp. click the Massing tab.rte. or select from a list. for File name.

13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. ■ ■ For Positioning. 17 In the warning dialog. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.Center. select Level 1. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click . depending on the complexity of the project. 14 On the View toolbar. and roofs. 16 On the Design Bar. Click Open. select Manual . An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. In a new project.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. such as walls. click the Close button. Level 1 is the only choice. For Place at level. curtain walls.

5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. and on the View Control Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.400mm displays.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . curtain walls. click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector. that compose the building. verify Basic Roof: Generic . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and roofs. select the face so that it highlights in red. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 4 On the Options Bar. After you create the building from the mass faces. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. such as walls.

This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. click Create Roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 9 On the Options Bar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the View toolbar. To see the new roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click to display masses. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected.

12 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click roofs that you created. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 21 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . click Modify to end the command.200mm displays. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. select Core Face: Exterior. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line. verify Basic Wall: Generic .15 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 22 In the Type Selector.

26 Click to redisplay the masses.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Curtain System by Face.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Create System. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Wall by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 38 Select the mass face shown below.35 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar. and select it. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Curtain System.

click Wall by Face. click Camera. Below the right corner of the view. under Floor Plans. specify a point to place the camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. and select the mass face shown below. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 .Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. click your building in the view. Click the frame to display its grips. specify a point for the camera target. as shown.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 48 On the View toolbar. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. roofs.

click . Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Click OK. click Modify. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. select Center. for Justification. and select the left curtain system in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 2 Pattern. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar.

Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. under 3D Views. and click Cancel to end the command. 63 In the Type Selector. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 59 On the View toolbar.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 56 In the Project Browser. 55 Right-click. double-click {3D}. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click 3D View 1. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and move the roof edges as shown below.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you can change these elements individually. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. A typical curtain system comprises a wall.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and they are not windows. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and mullions. panel. For example.rvt. To switch panel types. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. to resize the system. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Like windows. Like walls. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. 525 . you select the grid. grid lines. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. This affects the entire curtain system. click Training Files. you need to select a panel. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you need to change the length of the wall. Unlike windows. To change grids.

expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor.1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click Ground Floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 . and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser.

enter 1200. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. top and base attachments. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click (Properties). Click OK. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and room bounding. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. top constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.11 Select the curtain system. using curtain grids. For Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.

double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and click OK. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser.a. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. click Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 20 In the drawing area. and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. and resize the crop boundary as shown. right-click Elevation 1 . Creating an Entrance | 529 . click Curtain Grid. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. under Floor Plans. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. one larger than the other. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. Click to place another grid line. FOURTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. Click to create a vertical grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 33 On the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. and click OK. SIXTH FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and SEVENTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Curtain Grid. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.26 While pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.

37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 531 . The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it.

click Curtain Grid. select One Segment.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. and lock them. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 43 Delete the dimensions. click in any white space to exit the editor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Use the following image as a guide. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.

click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. under Elevations. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.rfa. 52 On the Type Selector. The panel changes to a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. double-click Entrance Elevation. This changes the graphics style of the Next. on the new curtain system you added. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. click view. Now. 55 In the Project Browser. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 57 On the View Control Bar. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid.Next. They are part of the curtain panel category. click Training Files. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 56 In the Project Browser. click Modify. These panels schedule as doors. 54 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. not as curtain panels.

and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 63 Click OK twice. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 With the panel still selected. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panels display in blue. and Material specifies the shading and patterning.60 On the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance | 535 . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click System Panel : Solid. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.

4 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Save As. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Grid Line Segment. select Entire Grid Line.rvt.68 On the File menu. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Mullion. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. clickModify. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. You are going to change some mullion joins. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. so you remove them next.6 On the Options Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. select All Empty Segments. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. however.

you can also right-click. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 15 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Finally. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 Click the top mullion control. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins.Two mullion join controls display. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.

you add a curtain system using the wall command. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. enter 1200. Click OK. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. for Top Constraint. Finally.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. click Wall. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. (Arc passing through three points). select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Curved Curtain System | 539 . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. For Top Offset.

11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then sixteenths. Divide the halves into quarters. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Next. eighths. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. double-click East. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. you place grids on the system. 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. You are going to use one of these snaps points.

select the bottom layer of panels. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . 16 On the Design Bar.300mm. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 18 In the Type Selector. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify. Next. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the extrusion. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. double-click Exterior. . and click . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100. clear Chain. 4 On the Design Bar. for Depth. click Model Lines.rft. under Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. select Glass.

20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 24 On the View toolbar. and return to the project file. click Modify. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. (SteeringWheels).rfa.rfa family. click (Default 3D View).Pattern.14 On the Design Bar. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Right-click. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .Pattern. select Curtain Panel . and click Change Walls Orientation.Pattern. under Floor Plans. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. right-click. 21 In the Type Selector. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. All fourth floor panels are selected. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 19 In the Project Browser. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.

right-click. All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Type Selector. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. select System Panel .Solid. 27 In the Project Browser. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . All the panels change to the solid panel. 30 Save the file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.

enter 8. click Lines. and select it. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.rft. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Select Radius. and enter 50 mm for the radius. and click OK. For vertical mullions. select Mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Click again to specify the ending point. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. . for Profile Usage. click ■ ■ For Sides. click Training Files. click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 8 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. double-click East. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).

and click OK. under 3D Views. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 31 Click . 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Visibility. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. and click Visibility. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. After the new profile is loaded. clear Coarse and Medium. 19 On the Design Bar.rfa family. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. and return to the project file. clear Fine. 17 On the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type. click Detail Component. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Mullion. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.detail. click (SteeringWheels).rfa. 20 Select the detail component. 28 On the View toolbar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 27 In the Project Browser.

33 Click Edit/New. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . right-click. 40 On the Design Bar. select Circular Mullion for Family. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 41 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 43 Press DELETE. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. for Profile. click Modify. You have placed more mullions than you want. click Duplicate. and click OK. 36 Under Construction. select All Empty Segments. 37 Click OK twice. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 44 Save the file.32 In the Element Properties dialog. so you remove the unwanted ones. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 38 On the Options Bar.

you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . a storefront system. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 1 In the Project Browser. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and you can click to select them all. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. TIP To chain select all the walls. and press TAB. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Pick Walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

10 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 9 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Finish Roof. 11 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. enter 600. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 16 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Roof Properties. click Mullion. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 18 Save the file.

You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Storefront System In this exercise. click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2400. select Unconnected for Height. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. enter 10200 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and click . under 3D Views. 9 On the Design Bar. The curtain wall cuts the original wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. Storefront System | 551 . which is specified in the type. and press ENTER. even if the wall height changes. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. click Modify. 8 Click the temporary dimension. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. For this wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Edit/New. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. This specifies an exact length for the wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

and Offset. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. select All Empty Segments. 18 On the Options Bar. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 15. see the Revit Architecture help. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. under 3D Views. By setting the Angle value. Angle. 16 Click OK. In this exercise. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you find Number. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Justification. or end. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. click Mullion. 19 Select a curtain grid. center. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 20 Save the file.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. and highlight the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.

12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 10 Select the panel. 11 Click OK. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click .8 Select the highlighted line. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.

and then eighths. right-click. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 18 Save the file. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and define a ruled curtain system. and then eighths.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. Finally. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. select System Panel : Solid. 16 In the Type Selector. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. quarters. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.

556 .

mansard. including hip. You do not need to create the work plane. gutters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In addition. In this lesson. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 15 In this lesson. In this tutorial.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. shed. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Roofs. and low sloped roofs. gable. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you learn how to add fascia. click Training Files. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 557 . a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. centerline. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Name. 4 Click OK. click the blue square on the witness line. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and so on). expand Floor Plans. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and click OK. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Ref Plane.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Lines.Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar.

press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 17 On the Tools toolbar. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand Sections (Type 1). Next. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press CTRL. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click Modify. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the second wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and double-click Section 1.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.

24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click model. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.

click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. verify that Defines slope is selected. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and double-click Garage Roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 3 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. m_Roofs. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Yes. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. sketch the roof footprint.

14 When you see the informational dialog. click Finish Roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and click OK. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click the model. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select both slope definition lines. click (Properties). enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Next. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. under Dimensions. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 15 On the View toolbar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. and on the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 11 Press CTRL.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. When you complete the roof. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Floor Plans. and enter 600 for Overhang. press TAB.rvt. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. 15 On the Options bar. click (Rectangle). 13 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. 17 When you see the informational dialog.6 Click to select all the walls. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 10 On the View menu. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Finish Roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. sketch the chimney opening. click Modify. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Defines slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.18 On the View toolbar. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. click (Trim/Extend). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and click (Pick Lines). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. using the following illustration for guidance. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 11 To trim the first line segment. clear Defines Slope. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical slope definition line.

16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Modify. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Finish Roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 14 Under Constraints. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. and click OK. click (SteeringWheels). The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Next. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 25 Proceed to the next exercise.21 Click (SteeringWheels). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 23 On the Tools toolbar. join the two remaining walls to the roof.

7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Next. expand Views (all). Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. clear Defines Slope. press TAB. click (Trim/Extend). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . enter 0 for Overhang.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 To trim the first line segment. and enter 300 for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click Pick Walls. 9 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. select the left vertical roof line. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls.

click Roof Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View toolbar. and double-click 3D. m_Roofs. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Next. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click Modify. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and press ENTER. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.rvt. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click 20 On the View toolbar. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. expand Views (all). and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 16 Under Constraints. expand 3D Views. you add a slope-defining line.

change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 9 On the Tools menu. 14 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. you need to add two reference planes. click Slope Arrow. Next. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. To help locate the position of each split. click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . add two new slope arrows. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. Before you can add slope arrows. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. expand Views (all). clear Defines Slope. click (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. and double-click Level 2.

574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select both slope arrows. 18 Press CTRL. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. (Properties). the adjacent eave heights must align. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. and click 19 Under Constraints.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then click OK. click Edit.rvt. 16 Repeat steps 13 . 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. and double-click Garage Roof. When eave heights differ. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 20 Under Dimensions. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Views (all). The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. m_Roofs. click Modify. select Slope for Specify. enter 500 for Rise/1000.

click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select a method to align the eaves. (Properties). 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click Align Eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Defines Slope. click Save As. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Finish Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. and click OK. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . on the File menu. under Dimensions. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. and save the exercise file with a unique name.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. When aligning eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000.

you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. expand Elevations. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. under Constraints. (Properties).Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. on the Options Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 3 Select the roof and. and double-click North. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. expand Views (all).rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. Next. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and then select Defines slope. click . expand Views (all).6 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and double-click Level 3. click Lines. click Modify. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and select the remaining three lines. click (Pick Lines). click Finish Roof. expand Floor Plans. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. under Dimensions. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. After you add the roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578.17 On the View toolbar. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you add a roof to a building shell. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Training Files.

5 In the drawing area. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 3 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Pick Walls. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 .

Insulation on Metal Deck . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Because the walls are not continuous. click (Trim/Extend). 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. for Type. and click OK. click Finish Roof. 7 On the Tools toolbar.EPDM. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Roof Properties. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select Steel Truss .

13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. double-click the section head to open the section view. 16 On the Options Bar. The roof has been created. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. click (Draw Split Lines). under Floor Plans. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. and click to select it. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click Roof. In the next steps.

20 Using the same method. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Move the cursor down. and select a point on the opposite roof line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . (Add points). You modify the points individually. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. In this exercise. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 23 On the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Next. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. and press ENTER. for the dimension. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 31 Select the roof slab. for Elevation. click Modify. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . and select all of the roof edges. 29 On the Design Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area.27 Press and hold CTRL.

for the Thermal/Air Layer. you learn how to create roof fascia. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and soffits. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. click Edit/New. on the File menu. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Gutters. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . gutters. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. you can easily create its fascia. Gutters. After you create a roof. click Edit.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and Soffits on page 586. In some cases this type of slope is desired. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. Creating Fascia. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. under Construction. 36 View the results in the section view. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and Soffits In this lesson. for Structure. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. By making the insulation layer variable. 37 If you want to save your changes. 35 Click OK 3 times. gutters. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. click Save As. The entire slab is sloped. select Variable. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. enter Built-up Fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Press CTRL. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rvt. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 8 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. click Duplicate. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Condominium. 5 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). and click OK.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

2 On the Options Bar. c_Condominium.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Gutters on page 588. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click (Properties). 13 On the Design Bar.

select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.3 In the Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Duplicate. Creating Soffits on page 590. Creating Gutters | 589 . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click in the Value field for Material. click Edit/New. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. under Construction. and click OK three times. . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 Click to place the gutter. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

Creating Soffits In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. expand Views.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. expand Floor Plans.

click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch.4 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Soffits | 591 . expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

3 Under Area. and open Common\c_Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select Millimeters. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. under Length. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Finally. If you are using metric units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 593 . 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select mm. your values will be different. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Click OK. In the final exercise.rvt. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Project Units. select Square meters. For Unit Suffix. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. click Training Files.

and click Room and Area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click the Area Schemes tab. click OK. click Settings. the system-computed height defaults to the level. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. it is not necessary in this exercise. For Unit Suffix. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. or 0. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. select 2 decimal places. expand Views (all). ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . These schemes define spatial relationships. 9 Click Cancel. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click the Room Calculations tab. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select m2.

11 In the New Area Plan dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . click Area. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. forming a closed loop. click Area Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. you must manually add these boundary lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. rather than the area tag. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. To modify the area. If you select No. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you must select one of the reference lines. Click OK. When you select Yes in this dialog.

596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. click Area Boundary. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Next. click Area Plan. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Click OK. you can either draw them or pick them. When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. and store area. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. common areas. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.

23 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the area. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 25 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . click Area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . Select Office area for Area Type. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 27 On the Options Bar.

29 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Area. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar.■ Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.

Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.■ Click OK. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Store Area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. name the project Area-in progress. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 37 On the File menu. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. In the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. and click to place the legend.rvt. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.

click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Available fields. select Area Type and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. select Areas (Rentable). click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.3 When the dialog displays. and click OK. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. under Category.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

You assign the default wall. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you then need to update the building face. volume. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. After you make building elements. and roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. In this tutorial. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. floors. 603 . At any time. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and perimeter information. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. curtain systems. and floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. If you modify a massing face. floor. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. building elements. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. or both. After creating mass floors. roofs. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.

right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 5 On the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and cutting geometry. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. click Training Files. and click Massing. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.rvt. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1. sweeps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Create Mass.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. (Line). click Extrusion Properties. 15 On the View Control Bar. for Extrusion End. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. click Lines. click 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click . (Pick Lines). select Mass (Opaque). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click the value for Material. for Name. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. click Lines. double-click Level 1. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Materials and Finishes. for Offset. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. under Constraints. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter 1550 mm. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.

under Views (all). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Constraints. under Materials and Finishes. select Pick a plane. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D} to see the results. press TAB to highlight the entire face. for Extrusion End. 21 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 25 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. double-click West. enter 25000. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click . 23 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). enter 27500. for Extrusion Start. click the value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. TIP If necessary. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. for Name. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. highlight the larger form.

32 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click (Draw). click Lines. and on the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar.31 Click to select the face. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and clear Chain. Next. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 37 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points).

Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 41 On the Edit toolbar. (Line). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. on the Options Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. under Views (all). click Edit Top.TIP If you do not see this option. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 39 On the Design Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. click (Move). 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. double-click East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.

53 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. (Arc passing through three points). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. and click OK. In the next exercise. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. click Blend Properties. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click 49 Create an arc as shown. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.48 On the Options Bar.

5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. under Floor Plans. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click (Line). click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 10 On the Options Bar.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 9 On the Design Bar. and select Chain. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. m_Massing_Start. under Views (all). 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Using the same technique. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. select the mass. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. double-click Level 1. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. as shown. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options bar. 2 In the drawing area. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.

When sketching each extrusion. In this exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . click (Default 3D View). snap the corners to the intersections.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. for Extrusion End. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 14 Under Constraints. 15 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. on the View Control Bar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. enter 0. click Extrusion Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown.

and click Lines. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 3 On the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. ■ For the radius.rvt. select a point below the mass elements. under Floor Plans. click Sketch 2D Path. 4 On the Options Bar. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing .

9 On the Options Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. The only way to align these elements is visually. 6 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click Lines. click Profile 1. 10 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 11 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Default 3D View). verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click Finish Path. Using Swept Blends | 613 .

15 On the Design Bar. click (Align).13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Profile. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and press ESC. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Profile 2. 17 Using the same method. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.

click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog. click <By Category>. select Mass (Transparent). and click . Using Swept Blends | 615 . 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. under Materials and Finishes. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice.

you create new family types from a mass family file. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.24 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.rvt. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Finally. click Finish Mass. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.

for Depth. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 7 Click New. In this exercise. 9 Click OK. 5 Click New. enter 18000 mm. enter 15000mm. 8 For Width. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click OK.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Height. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. for Height. and click Apply. for Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 9000 mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. click New. click Training Files. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 11000 mm. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. 6 For Width. for Height. and for Name. under Other. and click Apply.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. and click OK. enter 68000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. click Family Types. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Depth. enter 12000 mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 46000mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 6000 mm.

and Triangle. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Floor Plans. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 6 Open the Box-Training. under Views (all). click Training Files.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa. on the View toolbar. 3 On the View Control Bar.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . You also load other existing mass families and place them. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. as shown. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Training Files. click Place Mass.rvt. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa. 8 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa family files. Semi Barrel Vault. Arc Dome. 1 If not already selected. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Place Mass.10 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. and click to place the mass. 25 In the drawing area. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select the triangle. specify Mass (Opaque). click (Element Properties). as shown. for the Material parameter. 14 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 90 for Angle. and on the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select the box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. and click OK twice. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 17 Press CTRL. and click (Element Properties). select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. for the Material parameter. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . specify Mass (Transparent).

and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. specify Mass (Transparent). 33 On the View toolbar. for the Material parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 29 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Opaque). click Place Mass. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

Joining Mass Elements | 621 . NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap.rvt file. In the next exercise. you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. (Join Geometry). click (Default 3D View). Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.

double-click Site.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 4 Select the triangle. on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click (Mirror). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.

12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. (Join Geometry). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. as shown.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. enter SM. and then select the triangle. for Axis. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click (Draw). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View).

rvt. and select the triangle mass element. 1 On the Design Bar. you joined mass elements together.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 2 On the Window menu. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. (If Design Options is already selected. do not clear the check mark. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Modify. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

17 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Floor Plans. for the Material parameter. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Sloped (primary). and click OK. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. under Views (all). double-click Site. 7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. for Angle. enter 90. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click (Element Properties). 14 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and click OK twice. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Modify. clear Curved.

22 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click (Add to Design Option Set). under Views (all).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. double-click {3D}. 23 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. select the three arc domes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. double-click North. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. TIP To find the correct shapes. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. for the Material parameter. clear Sloped. and watch the status bar. and click OK. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Views (all). While pressing CTRL. specify Mass (Transparent). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. select Curved. 20 In the drawing area. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown.

and click Close.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 34 Close the warning that displays. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you can make it the primary option.rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. select Curved and. In this exercise. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you placed mass elements into Design Options. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. click (Design Options). click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 35 On the File menu. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. under Option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. click the Design Options tab. click Make Primary.

5 In the Type Selector.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. and for Loc Line. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files. click Wall by Face. click (Pick Faces). In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all).Brick on CMU.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create walls. select Wall Centerline.

double-click Level 5. click Wall by Face. 11 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 3. under Views (all).

under Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . If desired. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9.

you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. clear Curtain Panels. 6 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. and click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. under Views (all). 4 Click OK. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. click Modify. perimeter. double-click {3D}. click Mass Floors. select all levels.rvt. volume. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and exterior surface area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . When you select levels. and Walls.In this exercise. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. Curtain Systems. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors.

and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. click Mass Floors. 11 On the Options Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 Press CTRL. select Levels 1-4.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

and click OK. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 15 Press CTRL.14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .

4 Using the same method. select Mass Floor.rvt. The Floor Area. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. select Floor Area. and select Level. Floor Perimeter. Floor Volume. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.In this exercise. and click Add. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). under Category. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. schedules can be created using the mass floors.

and click OK. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mass: Family and Type. for Sort by. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . enter Retail. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Usage. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text.

select Mass: Family and Type. under Scheduled fields (in order). After you assign usage. 14 Select Level. click Edit. under Other. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing .Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. for Fields. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 13 With Usage selected. and click Remove. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties.

select Floor Area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Level. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and in the field below. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. for Field formatting. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). for Filter. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. click Edit. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter by. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . click Edit. 16 On the Formatting tab. for Then by. under Other. for Filter. under Other. elevation. and click OK. select Usage. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Hotel.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Fields. 19 Click OK twice. 27 Click OK twice. and select Grand totals. 18 On the Filter tab. select Usage. in the field under Filter by. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. and plan views. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties.

the floor area. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you created mass floor schedules.In this exercise. floor perimeter. click Roof by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. The mass floor schedules list. by level. double-click {3D}.rvt. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all).

Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .400mm. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.

8 Using the method you just learned. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. select Sloped Glazing. In this exercise. and click OK. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 13 Using the same method. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. and Walls. in the Type Selector. 15 Click the Model Categories tab.

3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). verify that Select Multiple is selected.rvt. double-click {3D}.

create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method. click Create System.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you change the size of an existing mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. for Width. Next. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all). and click (Element Properties). Roofs. 2 On the View menu. clear Exclude Design Options.1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. enter 30000. and click OK. Floors. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 6 On the Design Bar. and Walls. and then click OK. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. click Modify.

under Views (all). you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. In the next steps.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .

15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click (Default 3D View). press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 16 On the View toolbar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . you want to select the smaller one. Also.TIP To select the curtain wall. click Remake. click OK. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 17 Select the roof as shown. 14 On the Options Bar.

and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 .

9 Select Mass.Massing only. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. click All to select all categories. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Rename the view 3D . right-click {3D}. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . You might create the model shown.In this exercise. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell.

652 .

and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you not only simplify their placement. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. The new group is considered nested within the host group. You mirror one instance of the group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. hotel rooms. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. After you create a model group. For example. When you make changes to a nested group. In this exercise. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. or with those working on a different project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Creating. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. You can also nest groups within other groups. In another exercise. you also simplify the modification process. you add the new model group to a previously created group. 653 . place. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and typical office layouts. and modify repetitive units. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. the host group is also updated automatically. By grouping objects. all instances in the building model are updated. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. In this tutorial. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Modifying.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group.

NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area.rvt. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. enter ZR. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

and click OK. click (Group). The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. expand Model. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. right-click Typical Kitchen.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. clear Copy. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate).

one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown. and one rotated. 20 On the Design Bar. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 661 .rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. and click to select it. Modifying a Group In this exercise. click Save As.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click Save. press TAB to highlight the wall. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

press TAB.). select the element. press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. NOTE To display an excluded element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify.3 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).). and click member to group instance.

13 On the Design Bar.127mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. move the cursor to the left. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . Modifying a Group | 663 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 10 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Wall.

click Modify. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 On the Options Bar. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 In the drawing area. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Edit Group. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.17 On the Design Bar.

29 On the group editor toolbar. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups | 665 . Nesting Groups In this exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height. enter 2134.25 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). 26 Select the opening. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click 28 For Base Offset. enter 1000. and click OK. you add the Typical Kitchen group. created in an earlier lesson. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. under Constraints. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. click Modify.

666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. in the Project Browser. click Edit Group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. click (Add to Group).Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 667 . 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar.6 Press TAB. select the wall between the folding doors.

You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as text. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you add door tags to a group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. In the next exercise. and filled regions. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as door and window tags. double-click First Floor. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click Text. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click (Group). 14 On the Edit toolbar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. and select the text note and the filled region. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail. 22 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. under Groups.18 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 In the Project Browser. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. click Modify.

clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.rvt. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown. click Modify. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans.7 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . 8 In the Filter dialog. double-click Second Floor. select Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. click (Group).

Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. and click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 14 On the Options Bar. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. for Create new. and click OK. verify that Same as group name is selected. 5 In the New Project dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Open. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and expand Model. select 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 12 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 For File name. verify that Project is selected. click OK. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Modify. and click Create Instance. In this case. browse to the Desktop. and click Save. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and click Save Group.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. A warning dialog displays. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. accept the default template file. click Desktop.

click Training Files. 23 In the confirmation dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Revit Links. click Modify. click Use Existing. click Remove Link. click OK. and the link is removed. click Bind. 18 In the Project Browser. When a group is converted to a link. and on the Options Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. select the linked Revit model. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt. 24 In the message dialog.

Using Site Tools In this lesson. and walkways. In the final exercises. you add a building pad to the site. 677 . You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You add property lines manually.Site 19 In this tutorial. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. convert the data to a table. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.

and open Metric\m_First_Project.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.rvt. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. In the second part of this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Using the first method. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. click Toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Point. you create a toposurface using two different methods. and double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This project file was created using the default metric template. and click Site. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

12000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 680 | Chapter 19 Site .8 On the Options Bar. enter 1500mm. 12 On the Settings menu. under Increment. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. and click OK. Use the following illustration as a reference. 15000mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm.

on the Standard toolbar. click (Default 3D View). click Modify. 14 On the View toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar. enter 1000mm.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Before importing the contour data. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . click to view it at various angles. click to delete it. modify the level names and elevations. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. click the elevation value. (SteeringWheels). and double-click South.

For Layers. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. under Views (all). This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. click Pin Position. 29 Select the imported topography. rename the level Base Site Elevation. double-click Site. click Training Files. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. select Preserve. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Until it is exploded. and click OK. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. rename the level Basement. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Click Open. and press ENTER. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 28 On the Design Bar. select Specify. it is considered an import symbol. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Verify that Current view only is not selected.21 Click the Level 2 text. 30 On the Edit menu. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. click Yes. For Colors.

31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. click Toposurface. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Elevations. when the edges highlight. select it. click Modify. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. clear C_INDX. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and then click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.

Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using the first method. click (Default 3D View). you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click (SteeringWheels). 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save. Using the second method. click Finish Surface. name the project Site-in progress. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . you add property lines using two methods. Adding Property Lines on page 684. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. 40 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 42 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 39 On the Design Bar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.

4 On the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercise. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Property Line. click Lines. Site-in progress. under Floor Plans.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. double-click Site. Click Modify. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. do so before continuing.rvt. select Create property lines by sketching. Adding Property Lines | 685 .

on the Standard toolbar. 9 In the warning dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. A warning dialog is displayed.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. click Finish Sketch. select the lines. and click OK. to delete them. select Edit Table. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click 12 On the Design Bar. when they highlight. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. add an arc line on the right. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Property Line.

scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 15 Starting in Row #1. 16 Click OK.14 In the Property Lines dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. If the gap is not closed. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 19 In the Tags dialog. Adding Property Lines | 687 . enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click to place the property lines. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

In this exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 25 Under Visibility.20 Click Load.dwg and click OK. In the final step. 23 On the View menu. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 22 In the Tags dialog. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 27 On the Options Bar. you created two sets of property lines. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. click to place it. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. Before adding property line segment tags. The tags display more prominently in this view. this project file is required in its current state. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 30 On the View Control Bar. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. right-click in the Design Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Drafting. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. In the next exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the Imported Categories tab. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag.rfa. click Training Files. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK.

enter the name Working Contour. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 7 Click OK. click Site Settings. select Topography. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. Under Line Color. enter 1000. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Working Contour. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Site-in progress. click Object Styles. In the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. select Dash dot. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select Single Value. click New. Under Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise.0mm.rvt. Under Line Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Subcategory. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select a shade of Brown. 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Range Type.

such as material. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. In the next exercise. and islands. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Click OK. parking areas. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. parking areas. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. The object style subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise requires a new training file. Working Contour. In this exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified.

the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. click Subregion. 2 On the Design Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. try to replicate the location and proportion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.NOTE In the Metric training file. under Identity Data. enter Parking for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. click the value for Material. and click to open the Materials dialog.Tarmacadam for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .Tarmacadam. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.9 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. under Floor Plans. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. As you create new subregions. double-click Site. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. expand Schedules/Quantities. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 12 On the View Control Bar.

click Lines. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In this training project. under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. Within each subregion. 20 On the View Control Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. 16 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. Notice that the project area has increased. Delete overlapping lines.

24 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data.Grass for Name. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . select Site . and click to open the Materials dialog. click Properties. and click OK. 29 On the View Control Bar.23 In the upper-right parking area. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. enter Island . Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 28 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click the value for Material.Grass for Name. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Materials and Finishes. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Topography Schedule.

double-click Site. and apply the material Site . You must sketch each region separately.walkway. 35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway. Name each region Island Grass. under Floor Plans. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . click Subregion.31 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 696 | Chapter 19 Site .Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Project Browser. click Lines. double-click Site. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.

this project file is required in its current state.rvt.rvt. and click Save. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. When you use the grading tool. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. under Floor Plans. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

and click OK. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . 6 On the Design Bar. and click Select and Edit. Using Phasing on page 761. select Existing for Phase Created. see the tutorial. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. select Copy Internal Points. 8 Select the topographic surface. under Phasing. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. click Graded Region. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface.3 On the Options Bar.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. and new. demolished. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .

click Point. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click (Default 3D View).13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 702 | Chapter 19 Site .

click to view it at various angles. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. you can delete it. specify Existing for Phase. 23 Select the toposurface. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. only the original toposurface displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. and click OK. specify New Construction for Phase. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. and click OK. you create a building pad. (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Phasing. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and delete it. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . under Phasing. 24 On the View menu.20 On the View toolbar. Therefore. When you add a building pad. click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Only the graded topography displays.

click Lines. 2 On the View Control Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. the Pick Walls command is active. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click Pad. NOTE By default. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress.

For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 7 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (SteeringWheels). this project file is required in its current state. Notice the new building pad. 9 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components on page 706.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 On the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. and select the parking space. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.90 deg.rvt. under Floor Plans. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 3 In the Type Selector. click Parking Component.Adding Site Components In this exercise. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

double-click Site.9 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces. under Floor Plans. choose any tree type. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). click Site Component. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Selector.

Adding Site Components | 709 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. 5 On the View menu. click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. and click Apply. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. this project file is required in its current state. Site tutorial-in progress. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 8 On the Options Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. to position the shoulder of the leader. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. In the following exercise. as shown: 10 Using the same method.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. outside of the site. Click again to the left to position the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click up and to the left.

click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the 3 spot dimensions. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

16 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Clear Leader. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.

If necessary. and click OK. select Type. and click OK. and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. select Type. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Parking for Category. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.rvt. 9 On the Window menu. click the Fields tab. click Tile. 4 Under Available fields. double-click Site. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . number the first three spaces consecutively. 7 Under Fields. 13 In the Parking Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Size. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 8 Under Fields. This closes all the views except the parking schedule.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. select Mark. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. under Views (all). select Mark. under Floor Plans. and click Add. The parking schedule is displayed. click Close Hidden Windows. 11 On the Window menu. 5 Under Available fields. enter Space. under Space.

under Space. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces.

716 .

team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. go to the Worksets dialog. you specify an active workset. you can select which worksets are open or closed. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. A workset is a collection of building elements. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. In this tutorial. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. To make a workset editable.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. floors. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. and so on. such as annotations and dimensions. You can enable Worksharing for any project. such as walls. and click Editable. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. called Worksharing. however. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. doors. stairs. When you are working on a shared project. they cannot make changes to it. Elements specific to a view. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . select the desired workset. Using Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. use Element Borrowing. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you must first enable Worksharing. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. After the project is shared. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. All other team members can view this workset.

the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In the next exercise. Instead. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. for a typical project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. In most projects. You should have at least one workset for each person. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team.dialog. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Experience has shown that. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. and View worksets. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. In a multi-story structure. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. After learning the fundamentals. not including the Project Standards. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. When setting up Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. such as a tenant interior. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Shared Levels and Grids. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.

Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. When you create a new workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. For example. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Regardless of the default setting. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. if a workset named Interior was created. On this tab. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. with each assigned a specific functional task. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. As new members create worksets for their own use. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. When creating the new worksets. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing.Team member roles Typically. designers work in teams.

you can select which workset is active. Therefore.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. On the Options Bar. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Generally. When finished or at regular intervals. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. As you work. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When you save locally (to your local file). When you save to the central file. however. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save to the central file. the file is saved as the central file. This is called “Selective Open. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. After saving to the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should then save to your local file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you make that workset editable by you. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. This makes them available to other team members. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. within the local file. However. proceeds as usual. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. your changes are saved.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. your changes propagate to the entire team.

using VPN. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Alternatively. for instance. save to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. In this instance. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. In this situation. make any required worksets editable. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In this conceptual exercise.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. and then save the local file. To do this. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you work no differently then you would in the office. reload the latest changes from the central file. When working remotely. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. In the next exercise. and make that workset editable. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options.

The Worksets dialog displays. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. When you enable worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects ." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice all are editable by you. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 3 In the Worksets dialog.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets. Your username displays as the present owner. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.rvt. click Training Files. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. under Show. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

expand Views (all). Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". and double-click Level 1.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Because the interior walls appear in many views. under Identity Data. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and Views. click New. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Only User-Created worksets should display. click OK. type the name Exterior Shell. clear Families. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. For example. 17 On the Options Bar. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and click OK. Project Standards. imagine four users including yourself. For training purposes. In this case. expand Floor Plans. currently named Workset1. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 13 In the Rename dialog. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 12 Click Rename. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Therefore. you can rename the default workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. select Workset1. a small number of team members are working on the building model. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. however. 8 Click OK. 9 Click New. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. ■ 5 Under Show. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. You do. another is assigned the interior layout. click . In this training file. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. it is better to make them visible by default. When you initially activate Worksharing. In this simple training project. clear Visible by default in all views. 16 In the drawing area. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details.

click . and click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. click . including the interior doors. and walls. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.19 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and click OK. under Identity Data. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout for Workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 26 On the View menu. 23 Select all of the interior elements. click Visibility/Graphics. 29 Click OK. stairs. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view.

click Save As. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 30 On the View menu. under Identity Data. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click . 32 Select Interior Layout. click Non Editable. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . select Interior Layout for Workset. under Floor Plans. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 39 Click Save. 35 On the Options Bar. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 33 In the Project Browser. select all of the interior elements of the building model. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 41 In the Worksets dialog. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. In this exercise. 44 On the File menu. click Close. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If any interior elements remain. click Worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 34 In the drawing area. under Views (all). If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. Now that you have created the central file. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. and click OK. 38 In the Save As dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. double-click Level 2. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. and click OK. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 43 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

2 In the Open dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Save As. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and double-click Level 1. check out worksets. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 15 In the Project Browser. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and click OK. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Next. 13 On the Window menu. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. select Interior Layout. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 7 In the Save As dialog. Before working on the model. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 12 Click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. select the central file.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and select Specify. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. In this case. 6 On the File menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. In addition. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Open. 4 Click Open. make modifications to the building model. expand Floor Plans. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select Interior Layout for Name. click Options. 11 In the Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). please do so before continuing. you create your local file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets.

a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. 18 On the Options Bar. In this case. click Modify. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . you can still edit this wall. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 24 Click OK. On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. click . If it was owned by another user.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. and click OK. click Worksets. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 22 Click OK. In the Worksets dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. click . but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice the Editable Only option. 23 On the File menu. Because this element is not owned by another user. under Identity Data. 20 Under Constraints. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. however. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. If this is selected.

32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Door. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. click Wall. 31 On the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. The precise location is not important. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 29 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). 34 In the Type Selector.

they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. make elements editable. and reload the latest changes. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. it is recommended. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. By default. click Save to Central. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. When working in your local file. please do so before continuing. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this particular case. save to central. displays the workset as well as the element type. For training purposes. checked out worksets. a tooltip. Borrowed Elements is selected. At the end of a work session. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Whenever you save. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 37 In the Save to Central dialog.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. If you have not yet completed these exercises. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you should perform regular saves. In this exercise. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. leave this file open in its current state. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. two users access the central file through a network connection. each user must check out worksets. add two door openings into the rooms you created. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you created your local file. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Throughout the process. you should relinquish all worksets. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. and save locally immediately afterward. You modified the building model. In addition.

click Worksets. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. For training purposes. and click Save. 11 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Open. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. User 2: Create a local file. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and select Yes for Editable. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 In the Save As dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. return to the Settings dialog. and click OK. instructions are staggered. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Specify. This is a system setting. 4 Click the General Tab and. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and proceed to Creating a local copy. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. In addition. This file is for your use only. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In the following section of this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 7 In the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. select the central file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.rvt. select all the User-Created worksets. 9 Click Open. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Save As. skip the following section. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Options. click Options. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 15 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. enter User 2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 3 On the Settings menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. one user has already created a local file. specifically sequenced. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. under Username. You now have a local copy of the project.

22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 19 On the File menu. If you only have one workset checked out. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. expand Floor Plans.You are now the owner of that workset. 23 Click OK. open it now. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. modify the building model. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. it becomes the active workset. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 24 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 17 Click OK.” 29 Click OK. If it is not open. 27 On the File menu. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and double-click Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout.

under Floor Plans. Click Yes. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 44 In the Project Browser. However. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Yes for Editable. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 37 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. 41 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 33 On the File menu. under Views (all). 43 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Worksets. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.” 35 Click OK. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Before adding any furniture. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. When you save to central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. right-click Level 1. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.” 39 Click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 46 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. click Reload Latest.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything.

click Reload Latest. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 50 On the View menu. are placed under Project Standards. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter Exterior Wall . A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Edit/New. click Rename. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and click inside any room. click Save to Central. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 65 Click OK. 53 On the File menu.” 55 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. choose any desk. rather than Families. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. click Modify. the Visible by default option was not selected. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Project Standards. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 62 On the File menu. under Show. and click OK. click Save to Central. 66 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Therefore. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 48 In the Type Selector. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. and click OK. click Component. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. such as Wall Types. and click Element Properties. 49 On the Design Bar.200mm.

leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. throughout this training. select the following. click Options. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 70 On the File menu. and save 69 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. As each of you work. finished the previous workset exercises. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Reload Latest. click Training Files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. modified the building model. and these problems are rectified. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Save As. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. User 1: Reload latest. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Each user must have network access to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. There are specific instructions for each user. and click OK. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. leave this file open in its current state. and published their changes back to the central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). select Save to Central. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. Each user checked out worksets.rvt. Checking out worksets. you save the training file as a central file. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 18 In the Save As dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 5 Click Save. and click OK. 13 In the Open dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. and select Specify. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. return to the Settings dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. click Options. select the central file. 12 On the File menu. 6 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. 15 Click Open. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. Set the Username to User 2. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Save As. This is the local file for User 1. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. The central file should still be open. click Options. 17 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save. Next. and click OK. and click Save. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. click Open. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 .

30 On the left exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. select them. 24 Under Active Workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. select Exterior Shell. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Floor Plans. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. 27 Under Active Workset. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. click Worksets. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. verify that Editable Only is cleared. double-click Level 1. 29 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select the Interior Layout workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Afterwards. At this point. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. click the File menu. and then click OK. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. After you submit the request. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. and click Open. select the second window from the top. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.

In this case. select the following. to Local. click Close. and the other user granted it. click Check Now. select Save to Central. 36 Click Close. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. select the request submitted by User 2. and close 39 On the File menu. In this multi-user exercise. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. and notice the window is in the new location. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 35 Click Grant. and click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. you requested permission to edit the element. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 1 and 2: Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog.

738 .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. In this tutorial. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. At any time in the design process. For example. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Using design options. The client has asked you to create various options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have multiple sets of design options.

the roof and structure systems must work together. you can edit it. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. In the final exercise of this lesson. each with multiple design options. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. therefore. make your final design decision. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. click Edit Selected. and delete the unwanted options from the project. and click Close. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. In the second exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. After you create a design option. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you set up multiple design option sets. each is constructed for interchangeability. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Training Files. the only available command is to create a new option set. With the second option. click New. you design each of the structural options. TIP In this exercise. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .In the first exercise in this lesson. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). and open Metric\m_Urban_House. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Option Set. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. add three columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 7 In the Type Selector. select: ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the Edit toolbar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Column. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Modify. or add a dimension string between the columns. In the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Views (all). In this case. expand Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. By selecting Multiple. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. TIP To center the middle column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click 12 On the Options Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and the third column centered between the two.

18 On the View toolbar.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 17 Zoom out and. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click . they are difficult to see in this view. using the same technique. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.

24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Use the following illustration as a guide.Notice the 12 columns that you added. In it. click Modify. and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . The first click specifies the beam start point. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. Zoom in on the upper right column. click Beam. Next. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. under Floor Plans. select Round Bar : 50mm. 21 In the Type Selector. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

click 26 On the Options Bar. zoom into the left column. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. move down to the next set of columns. click . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and click the center point. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select: ■ ■ ■ .

enter Brackets for New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. enter Roofing for New. click Rename. 46 Under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog. not a new option set. 45 Under Roofing. 37 Select Option 2 and. 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. enter Beam for New. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. click New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. under Option Set. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). enter Structure for New. under Option Set. 40 In the Rename dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 41 Under Option Set. click New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. click New. name the option Louvers. 36 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option.

47 Under Roofing. name the option Sunscreen. click Rename. under Floor Plans. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . it will resemble the following illustration. 53 In the Project Browser. select Edit Selected. double-click ROOF TERRACE. Under Now Editing. select Beam. 52 Click Close. select Option 2. and click OK. When finished. 48 Under Option. This allows you to more easily manage the project. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 51 Under Edit. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Structure. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. The second click represents the plane that is moved. select M_Roof Beam. click Component.

click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. The first click sets the move start point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point. on the Edit toolbar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.

rvt. 66 On the View toolbar. and click Save. you need this file in its current state. 68 In the Design Options dialog. m_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 69 Click Close. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. name the file. click . which is visible by default. 70 On the File menu. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Save As. 67 On the Tools menu.

This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. expand Views (all). and double-click TOP OF CORE. under Roofing. each with multiple design options to pick from. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. delete them after the rafter is in place.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. expand Floor Plans. you design each of the roofing options. open it now. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 8 In the Type Selector. the other for beams. 10 Referring to the following illustration. With the second option. Sunscreen. you set up multiple design option sets. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. select Louvers (primary). You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. click Edit Selected. click Component. The first option. 3 In the Design Options dialog. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.In this exercise. If you need to add dimensions. 2 On the Tools menu. Under Now Editing. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The second roofing system. 4 Under Edit. In the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. a Louver system. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. do so now. 5 Click Close. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. under Other. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter 5 for Number. 16 On the Options Bar. click Array. Select Constrain. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click . and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 15 On the Edit menu. enter 11750 mm for Length.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

and select the louver you just placed. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Modify. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. 27 For the array starting point. click the Edit menu. enter 5475 mm for Length. Select Constrain. and click Array. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 26 On the Options Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. under Other. 23 On the Options Bar.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . Enter 34 for Number. click Component. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.

and press Enter. 29 On the View toolbar. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and.

and then click Close. under Roofing. Click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.The louver roof system is complete. click . click Edit Selected. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. expand Elevations. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 34 In the Project Browser. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. In this case. and double-click West. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Finish Editing. select Sunscreen. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and click OK. 30 On the Tools menu. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. under Edit. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 33 Under Editing. click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. Therefore.

enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. Select the right arc. and the third point defines the arc. 41 Select the top of the left column. 49 On the View toolbar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. then the center arc. The arcs should connect. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 46 On the Tools menu. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Constraints. 48 On the Design Bar. click . The roof sketch must be a continuous line. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. the top of the next column on the right. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. You will fix this in a later step. 43 On the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. click Trim/Extend. then you can modify it through the dimension. click Properties. Under Constraints. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible.

52 On the File menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Duplicate. make it part of the building model. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. under 3D Views. and last options. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. Managing Design Options | 757 . After exploring the combinations.The louver roof system is complete. 2 In the Project Browser. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. In this exercise. and click Rename. under Views (all). right-click the 3D View Primary Option. under Edit. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 50 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the roofing options. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. The first option. secondary. and delete the discarded design options. you need this file in its current state. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. enter Primary Option. Managing Design Options In this exercise. and click OK. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. right-click {3D}. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Sunscreen. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 4 In the Project Browser. and then click Close. click Finish Editing. do so now. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). tertiary. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. a Louver system. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you select a design. expand 3D Views. click Save.

This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click Rename. 9 Click OK. double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. 7 On the View menu.5 Right-click each of the copies. double-click Secondary Option. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 11 On the View menu.

under 3D Views. under Views (all).14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. Managing Design Options | 759 . and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 19 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. In your design options. 18 In the Project Browser. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. At this point. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Last Option. 15 On the View menu. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option.

This was the client choice for structural. select Beam. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 31 In the alert dialog. double-click Primary Option. 26 Under Option Set. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. but should be accepted as part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. click Close. since you no longer need them. 27 In the alert dialog. under Structure. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 35 On the File menu. the beam option becomes part of the model. made it part of the building model. you selected a design. click Save. After exploring the combinations. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. select Make Primary. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. In this exercise. 23 In the Design Options dialog. An alert is displayed. 29 Select Roofing. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 24 Under Option. click Yes. Because the client has selected the design option. 25 Select Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Accept Primary. 33 In the Design Options dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Yes. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.22 On the Tools menu. the current primaries are no longer options. click Delete. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. The set is deleted. 30 Under Option Set.

you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the second exercise. and then add new building model elements. 761 . you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. This changes room definition and total building model area. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You create new phases. For the client.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. demolish existing construction. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing walls and doors. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. complete with schedules.

762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and open Common\c_Phasing. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. under Phasing. If you wish to do so. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 4 Click Cancel. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. go to the Settings menu. regardless of phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. click Training Files. When you create a new project. During the demolition and renovation process. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. click Modify. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. expand Views (all). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 6 On the Options Bar. define the units. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click Cancel. you do not need to change the project units to metric. expand Floor Plans. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click (Element Properties). This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. As you add new elements to the building model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. are visible in this view. click Project Units. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. This means that all building model elements. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created.

you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 19 In the Project Browser. are highlighted in red. clear Door Tags. and click OK. right-click Level 1 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. under Floor Plans. all of the building model elements. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click .Existing. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. under Floor Plans. and click OK. for Phase Created. Because this is a phase-specific view. Phasing Your Model | 763 . and click OK. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. enter Level 1 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. right-click Copy of Level 1 . under Floor Plans.Existing. select Existing. 17 Click No. right-click Level 1. After you create the views. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Filter dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.Existing. enter Level 1 . This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a renovation project. under Phasing. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components.Demo. 16 In the Rename dialog. click (Filter Selection). including the door tags. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. After you release the mouse button.

Demolished. under New. Phase status is time-dependent. under Floor Plans.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Next. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 26 In the Phasing dialog. select Existing. double-click Level 1 . 29 For Composite Plan. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Later in this exercise. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and Temporary.Existing. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. however. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. for Phase. On a logical time line.Demo. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click the Phase Filters tab. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. There are five default phase filters. 28 Under Filter Name. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. enter Composite Plan. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. select Overridden. 27 Click New. Because of this time relationship. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. In this case. new construction occurs after existing construction. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 21 In the Project Browser. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. to which all the building model elements belong. under Phasing. double-click Level 1 . you modify these settings. You may need to zoom in to see this. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Existing.

33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 34 In the Color dialog.Demo. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. under Cut ➤ Lines. select red. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1 . or you can use the demolish tool. select the interior walls one at a time. select Demolished. under Floor Plans. click OK. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select a lighter blue. Next.Existing. 32 In the Demolished row. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. under Floor Plans. its display changes to a red dashed line. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. you begin demolition. 36 Using the same method. As you click each wall. There are two ways to demolish an element.31 Under Phase Status. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. double-click Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 765 . Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. When you demolish the host. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select the line style. 42 In the Project Browser. click the value for Color. click (Demolish).

45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New.Existing. The demolished walls no longer display.Demo. select Basic Wall: Interior . select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 50 In the Type Selector. add a long horizontal wall. and click OK. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Wall. 49 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. click Door. 52 Open Level 1 . under Phasing. under Phasing. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 53 Open Level 1 . and click OK.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). for Phase Filter.

Phasing Your Model | 767 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. which are displayed as red. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 61 On the View Control Bar. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 59 Open Level 1 . new is shown in blue. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. right-click Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All. regardless of phase. and existing shows as half-tone. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. click (Default 3D View).Demo. 57 In the Project Browser. 62 If necessary. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. All elements are displayed in this view.New. 60 On the View toolbar.

2 Open Level 1 . room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. click Training Files. 3 Open Level 1 . you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you wish to save this file. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. demolition. therefore. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. click Project Units. As the renovation process continues. you can see the new walls added to the building model. expand Views (all). and click OK. You can also see that the room quantities. define the units. and double-click Level 1 . and new construction. In the next exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. If you wish to do so. go to the Settings menu.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. sizes. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.rvt.Existing. Notice that this view is the original building model. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 63 Close the file. In this view. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. the rooms change in both definition and size. you do not need to change the project units to metric. In this exercise. All room boundaries are phase-specific. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you can do so at this time.Demo. In this view. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. In the Phasing dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Existing. Use the following illustration as a guide. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 10 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Room Tag. click in each room as you move to the right. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click Modify. 5 Click OK. and maximize the view.New. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 13 Open Level 1 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Demo. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

and double-click Room Schedule . notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Close Hidden Windows.New Construction. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. click Tile. In this case. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. In this exercise. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 16 In the Project Browser.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 20 Close the file. 17 On the Window menu. 18 Open Room Schedule . You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 19 On the Window menu. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. The two schedule views tile. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. In addition. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. expand Schedules/Quantities.

you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. performance. In this tutorial. In these situations. 771 . You position the building models on the site plan. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. This maximizes efficiency.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. modify their visibility. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link two building models to the project.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. and the other is a townhouse. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You position the building models on the site. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

click Save As. Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Common\c_Site. 4 On the File menu. 5 On the File menu.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. click Close. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. and save the file there. ■ ■ Manual . click Training Files.rvt. and click OK. in the Model Linking folder that you created. you can do so. right-click. and click Properties. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. click Open. c_Condo_Complex. 8 Clear Read-only. Click Open. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. with write permission. this system is not exposed to the user. Otherwise. however.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. click Open. this option will place the link at a predefined location. 2 On the File menu. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. select the three files. RELATED See the lesson. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.■ Auto . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. All three files now reside. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Select c_Site. c_Townhouse. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Auto . This option is grayed out.

Origin to Origin. For Positioning. and make your changes. select Auto . 13 Click Open. If you wish to do so. 11 On the File menu. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. expand Views (all). you can go to the Settings menu. and double-click Level 1. click Project Units. 10 In the Project Browser. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. expand Floor Plans. you do not need to change the project units to metric.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines.

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. After you select it. Standard move commands work with linked building models.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 15 On the Edit toolbar. The Move command requires two clicks. The linked model moves as one object. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click (Move). The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 17 For the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.

Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. select Auto . 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. For Positioning.After you specify the location to move to. and select c_Townhouse. 18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 21 Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. 23 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point.

click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The Copy command works much like the Move command. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy).

33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click Rotate. enter Townhouse A. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 32 On the Edit menu. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. under Identity data. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 35 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. for Name. click . 37 On the View toolbar. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.

click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel.38 On the File menu. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. they were placed too low within the site topography. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. click (SteeringWheels). click and hold Orbit. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . After linking the files. click Save. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. In the next exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. do so before continuing. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar.

the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click to select it. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. when it highlights. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you first select the plane you want to align to. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. Click the Revit Links tab. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference.rvt. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. click (Align). and double-click South. When using the Align command. and click to select the line. To do this. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. and click OK. In this case. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. expand Elevations. In the steps that follow. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 3 In the Project Browser. and then select the plane that you want to align. under Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. This would over-constrain the model. under Elevations. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 9 In the Project Browser. click and hold Orbit. click Save. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the File menu. (SteeringWheels). 12 On the View toolbar.

display settings. under Elevations. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.rvt. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 4 Under Visibility. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 9 Under Visibility. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. As you can see. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. expand c_Townhouse.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file.rvt. 8 For Annotation Categories. do so before continuing. and the halftone settings for each linked project. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you need this project file open and in this view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. you can independently control the visibility settings. click the Revit Links tab. 2 On the View menu. click Custom. In the next exercise. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. double-click South. select <Custom>. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. In this exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. By linked view. click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. detail level. click By Host View. If the Basics page is set to Custom. When you link a file. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. or Custom. click Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.

This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. click the Revit Links tab. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . under Display Settings. By selecting custom under Model Categories. 23 In the Model categories list.rvt. medium. click the Revit Links tab. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. expand c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. click By Host View. In this case. click Visibility/Graphics. on the Basics tab. and then set the detail level to coarse. 20 For c_Townhouse. 16 Under Visibility. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. and click OK. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 24 Click OK. With linked files. By default. 14 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. or fine. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. You can click the value for Detail Level. Using the Custom option. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. no detail level changes are required.rvt. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. select Custom.

existing. you need this project file open and in this view. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range.rvt. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . all new. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. click Custom for the Townhouse link. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. In this case. you manage the linked files. there are situations. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In this case. 31 On the File menu. select c_Townhouse. click Save. In most cases. 26 Under Display Settings. All other components are grayed out. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. on a sloped site for instance. However. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 25 On the Revit Links tab. this is preferable. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. demolished. 28 Select By linked view for View range. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. In the next exercise. click OK. By default. In this exercise. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. 29 Click OK. With the Show All filter applied. under Visibility. and phase filter of a specific link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. phase. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. In general. click the Revit tab. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active.rvt. click Yes. 7 Click OK. and Saved Path fields are read only. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. Notice the Loaded. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. They supply information regarding the links. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. 5 Click Unload. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. Locations Not Saved. the link is maintained. click Manage Links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select c_Condo_Complex. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. 6 At the confirmation prompt. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. 3 Under Path Type. The default path type is Relative. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . In a shared coordinate environment. do so before continuing. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. You learn more about this in the next lesson.

In the Import/Link RVT dialog. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. When you initially place the link. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. 9 On the File menu. In these cases. 8 In the Project Browser. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. right-click c_Condo_Complex. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical.rvt. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. the link is not loaded. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. expand Revit Links. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. click the arrow next to the Open button. However. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. and select Specify. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. and click Reload. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. click Save As. To do this. In general. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. If you choose not to open that workset. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens.

the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . leave the project file open in its current view. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. The host file consists primarily of site components. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you are establishing a shared origin point. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside.10 In the Save As dialog. When used in conjunction with model linking. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In this exercise. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. When you share coordinates between projects. In the next lesson. In essence. do so before continuing. name the file Site_Project. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. and save it as an RVT file. If you have not completed the previous lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. and the resulting project files.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. As indicated in the Status Bar. and the resulting project files. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. When you are working in the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. open it before continuing. click Open. Linking Building Models on page 772. 2 On the Tools menu. Select Site_Project. In this case. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have not completed the lesson. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the drawing area. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.coordinates are used. click the Condo Complex. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. do so before continuing. If you have closed the project.rvt and click Open. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.

On the Status Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. it is placed at a specific location. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. do so before continuing. but can have multiple additional locations. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. and Lot C.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. and click OK. However. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. when the edges highlight. select Location 1. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click to select it. If you have not completed the exercise. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. These three locations can be named Lot A. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. In this exercise. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. you need this project file open and in this view. Lot B. even though both models originate from one linked file.

click Rename. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. select Move instance to. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Rename dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This is a one-time operation. click Change. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Record the current position as a location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click . Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. When constraining a link to a location. click Not Shared for Shared Location.2 On the Options Bar. . 4 Under Value. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. enter Lot A for New. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Choose Location dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Reconcile. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click OK.

and click OK. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. When you create a location. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. The second click specifies the move endpoint. select Save. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. By relocating a project. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. click Duplicate. click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 16 Click Change. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. click the Revit tab. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. This is a two-click process. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you release the mouse button. 23 Click Save Locations. ignore the warning. Because Lot A is currently in use. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click Manage Links. The first click specifies the move start point. To explicitly save a location. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. the active location position is moved. and then select the townhouse project. a warning displays. enter Lot B for Name. 26 Click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. When you relocate a project. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. or cancel the action. make sure Lot B is selected. Notice the OK button is still not active. Record current position as. Save locations 21 On the File menu. you cannot redefine its location. and click OK. and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. select the second option. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.

34 On the File menu. and click OK. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. select Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. NOTE In the following exercise. click Close. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. click Save. In this exercise. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 33 On the Edit menu. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 36 On the File menu.

the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.By Shared Coordinates. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.rvt file. In addition. Select c_Condo_Complex. When opening the linked file. select Auto . Link a project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file. double-click 1st Floor. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. click Open. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. under Floor Plans. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. For Positioning. Because this building model only has one named location. do so before continuing. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The current active location is Lot A. Also. if other models were linked into the same host. 2 On the File menu. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . Click Open. If you have not completed the exercises. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. it is placed automatically within the host project.

click OK. select True North for Orientation. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. click Manage Place and Locations. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. you create a new location. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you can select Lot C if necessary.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. enter Lot C. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. click Duplicate. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. under Graphics. click Manage Place and Locations. 6 Select Lot B. orient a view to true north. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. click View Properties. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. and click Make Current. If you have not completed the exercises. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the host file. In the next exercise. do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you manage the shared locations. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 3 In the Name dialog. In this exercise.

You can save the file if you wish.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Open. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.rvt and click Open. In this exercise. If you have not completed the exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Select Site_Project. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. On the Options Bar. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 10 On the File menu. click Close. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Count. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 5 Under Available fields. select Doors. click the Fields tab. and click OK.

and then click OK twice. and click Properties. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 13 On the File menu. under Other. 14 On the File menu. click Close. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . In this exercise. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 12 Select Grand totals. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. right-click Door Schedule. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. You have completed this tutorial. click Save. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project.8 Click OK. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

selection default options. they are not saved to project files or template files. which is independent of the project settings. and set it as your default template. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 4 Under Colors. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 6 In the New Project dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click Training Files. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In the second lesson. 11 Under Colors. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. 3 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab.rte.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. and your username when using worksets. select Invert background color. click OK. In the first lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you modify the system environment. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the drawing area is black. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. notification preferences. 803 . click Browse. click the value for Selection color. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you create an office template. 8 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. Finally. 10 In the Options dialog. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. and click OK. journal cleanup options.

Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 22 When prompted to save changes. click Modify. click the Graphics tab. select One hour.12 In the Color dialog. select None. and select the wall. click Wall. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. and click OK. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Modify. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 14 Under Notifications. select red. 15 Click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 26 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. and open Metric\m_Settings. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Invert background color. select yellow. However. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the elements causing the error display using this color. For Selection color. click No. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. For Tooltip assistance. 13 Click the General tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 Under Default template file. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 .27 Click the General tab. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. centralized. and family libraries. If prompted. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. 8 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Specifying File Locations on page 805. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. you specify default file locations. select the folder to save your files to by default. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. These files are used in the software support process. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Under Journal File Cleanup. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. This path is set automatically during the installation process. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 7 In the Options dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. such as in a large. select Normal. notice the list of library names. click the File Locations tab. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. select your preferred Save reminder interval. and click Open. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. For Tooltip assistance. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. family template files. click Places. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. click Browse. TIP To view a template. Your login name displays by default. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. However. you can start a new project with that template. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. under Default path for family template files. click Browse. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 10 In the Places dialog. do not save the changes. including your default project template. and click Browse to select a template. Under Username. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog.

under Libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. Save. click (Add Value). notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click the icon side of the field. and you can create new libraries. templates. 11 In the Places dialog. When you are opening. and select it as the library path. In the following illustration. Load. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .library names and path. and change the name to My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. saving. or families. or loading a Revit Architecture file.

15 Under Library Name. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. This path is determined during installation. click the Spelling tab. Load. 3 Under Settings. and click OK twice. click My Library. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. enter sheetmtl-Cu. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 23 Select My Library. and decal image files. (Remove Value) to delete the library. If you work in a large office. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Save. such as bump maps. click the My Library icon. click Edit. custom color files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and Import dialogs. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. specify the new location here. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. view the current path. 28 Click OK. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 22 Click Places. 2 In the Options dialog.

4 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 22 In the text editor. do not save the changes. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Browse.11 In the Options dialog. work with snapping turned off. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify snap settings. If prompted. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. you modify snap increments. click Modify. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click OK. click Text. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click the Spelling tab. click default template. 19 Under Settings.rte. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 21 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. You can turn snap settings on and off. click OK. 18 In the Options dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

click OK. click Wall. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 ..6 Under Dimension Snaps. While sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter SM. If you do not have a wheel button. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. such as ZO to zoom out. use the wheel button on your mouse. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom out until it does so. For example. and enter 500 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. 7 Under Object Snaps. TIP To zoom while sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If it does not. clear Chain. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 10 On the Options Bar. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. If you move the cursor along the wall.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. and do not save the file. Do not set the wall end point. and the wall edges. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and click Wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and delete the value 500 . 26 Proceed to the next lesson. This is the increment that you added previously. 18 Enter SM. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and move the cursor to the right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and specify the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. 21 Move the cursor downward. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. fill patterns. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you apply a material to an element. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Using these options. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. click Training Files. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Finally. In the steps that follow. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and object styles. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. and open Metric\m_Settings. You create and modify materials. annotations. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. lines. you render a region to observe the changes.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Modifying Project Settings | 811 .rvt. save the project file with a unique name. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.

812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Click the Graphics tab. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. The properties describe the color. Masonry . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and texture of the material.Fieldstone.Fieldstone material. scale. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . and click OK. In the steps that follow. However. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. and select Masonry . and double-click 02 Entry Level. and click (Element Properties). The Render Appearance Library is a local.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. enter Masonry . read-only library for render appearances. this material provides a starting point for the new material.Fieldstone. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. select Stone. When a model element is loaded into a project. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. In the next exercise. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. These details will display in rendered images.Stone. In the Materials dialog. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. and click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 6 Click Replace. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. When you change properties of a render appearance. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 3 Click (Duplicate). for Class. 11 Click OK. 9 Click Apply.

click Edit. 20 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material field. 26 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click Model Graphics Style. 23 While pressing CTRL. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. and click OK. 16 Enter the new wall name. 22 Select the left exterior wall. . 15 Click Duplicate. 21 Click OK three times. select the rear exterior wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 18 For Finish 1.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 For Structure. click This is the material that you created. click (Default 3D View).Fieldstone. Fieldstone on CMU. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 19 On the right side of the Material field. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 25 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New. 24 In the Type Selector.Brick. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. select Masonry .Fieldstone. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall.

click Render. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. In the following exercise. select Low or Medium. The rendering process begins. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. select Region. When finished. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. select the render region (a red rectangle). you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. right-click the Design Bar. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. for Setting. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. and click Rendering. under Quality. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 29 In the 3D view. click Rendering Dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 7 Under Custom. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. expand Elevations. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click West. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. such as steel. Then click Render again. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Import. 3 Under Pattern Type. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. click Show the model. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. 5 Click New. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. in the Rendering dialog. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.rvt. Zoom into the model. choose Model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. and clear Region.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. select Custom.rvt. click Show the model.

24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. and for Import scale. under Pattern Type. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. enter .Fieldstone material.Fieldstone. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 9 Under Custom. click in the Material field. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK three times. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click 15 For Structure. 23 On the Design Bar. click Edit. select Model. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. for Finish 1. 11 Click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows.pat. click to select a fill pattern. 18 Under Surface Pattern. select fldstn. click OK. click Training Files. 10 For Name. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 21 In the Materials dialog. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click . and click OK. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. In the Materials dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog.56. (Element Properties). enter Fieldstone.

and double-click 3 Windows. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. expand 3D Views. TIP If the pattern does not display. m_Settings-in progress. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. For example. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.25 On the View toolbar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. there are often multiple window types within a project. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). you can set the window frame material to By Category. 2 On the keyboard. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

click Modify. click (Element Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and click 15 Click OK twice. 9 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. . 11 On the Options Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the arched window. click By Category. click By Category (located under the materials list). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click (Element Properties). and click . for Trim Exterior Material. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows.3 On the View Control Bar. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click in the Value column. 16 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 14 In the Materials dialog.

19 For Trim. 23 Click Replace. expand Windows. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. click in the Material column.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. type red. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 18 On the Model Objects tab. . 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. click OK. When you render a 3D view. click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. or keywords include the word red. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. select Trim. for Class. descriptions. select Paint.red paint. and click OK. 28 Under Shading. enter Trim . and select Trim. (Duplicate). Controlling Object Styles | 819 . 29 In the Materials dialog. 25 In the search field. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.

you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 10 For Line Color. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. for Name.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Roofs. Use object styles to apply the change to all views.31 On the View toolbar. under Category. Now that you have created a line pattern. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click New. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. is open with the 3D view active. select Red. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. enter Roof Line. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. (Default 3D view). 11 For Line Pattern. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. select Roof Line. 7 On the View Control Bar.

click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Project Browser. but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.12 Click OK. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the line color displays in this view. under 3D Views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . The line style is applied to the roof in the view.

select Blue. 18 For Line Color. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. double-click 03 Roof. click Override. select Roof Line. sections. elevations. select 5. select Roofs. for Visibility. under Category. select Roofs.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Solid. select Black. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 For Line Pattern. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 In the Project Browser. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. For Color. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 20 Click OK. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Pattern. Plans. under Floor Plans.

29 For Name. select Zoning Setback. This places the line above the topography. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Line Pattern. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select 2. 33 In the Type Selector. under Modify Subcategories. select Double dash. (Line). select Level: 02 Entry Level. 34 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 31 Click OK.25 Click OK twice. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. Click Click (Draw). enter Zoning Setback. click New. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Red. For Line Color. Notice the site topography and the property lines. and click OK. 28 In the Line Styles dialog.

42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. click (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. Expand Site. 39 Click OK. expand Lines. select it. 44 On the View toolbar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. double-click 02 Entry Level. Modifying Annotations on page 825. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 36 On the View toolbar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. (Default 3D View). use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 In the Project Browser. and clear Property Lines. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 43 Click OK. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. NOTE If Site is not selected.

and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click Duplicate. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Under Text. For Units. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click the default value. select Feet and fractional inches. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. You have created a new dimension style. under Floor Plans. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. for Units Format. click Modify. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 4 Enter the name Linear . 7 Click OK twice. m_Settings-in progress.Imperial. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click one wall. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.Imperial and click OK. m_Settings-in progress.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 9 In the Type Selector. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. select Linear . click Dimension. (Undo). 10 On the Standard toolbar. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level. and then click outside the second wall. Modifying Annotations | 825 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click another wall. To place a dimension.

Then press Delete. click M_Window Tag . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Element Properties).rfa. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 19 Click Load. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.Number is now the assigned tag. notice that the label displays 1i. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click the bottom window. 16 Click Cancel.14 On the Options Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. clear Leader. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Tag All Not Tagged.Number. under Category. In the steps that follow. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click Training Files. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 18 In the Tags dialog. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag .Number as the assigned tag. 27 On the west wall.Number. click Tag ➤ By Category. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. scroll down to Windows. 28 On the Design Bar. 23 Click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. Leave M_Window Tag . 21 In the Tags dialog. select the 3 window tags. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. In the preview image.

(Default 3D View). click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Unless overridden. 30 Under Leader. In the first section. click the default value. Click OK. select To the nearest 100. 32 On the View toolbar. and Detail Level Options on page 827. and click OK. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Unless overridden. click Modify. select Openings. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. for Length. In the final section. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.Number. m_Settings-in progress. click the default value. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. M_Window Tag . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the second section. 6 Click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. For Unit symbol. dimension values display using this setting. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. select Faces. notice Window Tags appears twice. dimensions use these project settings. for Rounding. and click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specifying Units of Measurement.rvt. for Area. select meters squared. Specifying Units of Measurement. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. the other displays the instance value. and Detail Level Options | 827 .Temporary Dimensions. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 8 Under Walls. select 0 decimal places. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. you modify the detail level assignments. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. verify that Create is clear. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Under Category. Temporary Dimensions. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK.

In this project. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 12 Click OK. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and expand 3D Views. In this table. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click . you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You do not select a view scale to move it. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Views (all). Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.

5 On the Views tab. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. select Type/Discipline. expand each view type. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. expand Sheets (all).Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click Apply.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. select Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.

expand each sheet set. and click New. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Sheets. 12 Click the Sheets tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. click the Folders tab. 16 Click the Views tab.

Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work.rte template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. In the lesson that follows. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. and open Metric\Templates. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and expand both Architectural and Structural.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. and view names. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. 2 Under Template file. For example. and click OK. In this lesson. under Views. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Creating an Office Template on page 831. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. dimensions styles. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. and Discipline. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. click Browse. If you want to save this file. In that case. click Training Files. Whenever you create a new project or template. and click OK. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you create an office template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . Proceed to the next lesson. you select the starting point for your office template. You can also save these settings in a template file. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. When you create new projects. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. levels. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You can choose from several templates. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. expand Complete. expand 3D Views. navigate to your preferred directory. the same rules apply. 21 In the Project Browser. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. View Type (Family and Type). You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. when you create a new project. enter a unique file name. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 6 Click OK. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. click Browse. you can select it now. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 14 Click Open. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 12 Under Template File. In this exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you modify the project settings for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.5 In the New Project dialog. If you have additional projects open. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 Select the default template. select Project. 15 Under Create new. and double-click North. 9 In the Project Browser. If you want to use a template other than the default. in the drawing area. and click OK. for Create new. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. close them. weights. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 7 In the Project Browser. When you create the material. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. select Project template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. navigate throughout the various views and schedules.

13 If necessary. the changes are saved as part of the project template. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. texture. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. or refer to the online help. and similar attributes. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. rotate. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. line patterns. annotation objects. and materials for model objects. TIP For more information about creating new materials. line colors. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. For more details on modifying these settings. and scroll through the list of categories. In the Object Styles dialog. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.During this exercise. Observe the materials that are already defined. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. and move model patterns. create new subcategories. see the previous lesson. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. and imported objects. When you create or modify a material. and change render appearance properties. For more information. create and modify them as needed. you can set line weights. including color. transparency. 2 Scroll down the materials list. You can align. If you change render appearance properties. or modify existing patterns. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 4 Click Replace. or refer to the online help. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. see a preview of the rendered material. 9 Click OK when finished. You do this by defining the render appearance. specific modifications are not dictated. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 34 Click OK. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. and click Edit. 20 Click OK. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. name the style. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. create new line subcategories. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. You can add and delete view scales. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. select it. and specify the properties. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. tags. 19 If necessary. click Duplicate. such as section lines and dimension lines. select it from this list. or line pattern as needed. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and create new subcategories as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 18 For existing line categories. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and dimensions. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. modify the line weight. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed.15 Modify categories. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 36 Select the Type drop-down list. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 32 To modify a line pattern. line color. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 29 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed.

You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. specify the default location for temporary dimensions.40 Click OK. click Format. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. For example. and radial dimensions are modified separately. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. To see the details of a particular style. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. select it from this list. TIP In the drawing area. and Angle settings. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Volume. 46 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . click Load. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 58 Click OK. 60 Under Walls. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. In the Tags dialog. 62 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. when you add a door with the tag option selected. click Duplicate. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and specify the properties. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and choose a decimal symbol. Linear. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 57 Specify the Slope option. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 55 Click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. and click OK. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 53 For Length. name the style. angular. 50 To load new annotation tags.

you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 64 Review the table. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or edit existing organization types. click the arrows between columns. When you create a new view. 70 Click the Sheets tab. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. create new browser organization types. and move view scales as needed. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. and make modifications in each area as necessary. You can find additional information in Help. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. The detail level is based on view scale. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. For example. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 73 Click OK. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. However. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. create new browser organization types. rename. rename. 72 If necessary. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or edit existing organization types. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. or Fine. 65 Click OK. 68 Delete. In such a case. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Medium. In a typical project. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 69 If necessary. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. click the Views tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. To move the view scales. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. See Setting up If necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. 71 Delete. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Links to associated tutorials are provided. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Use the table below as a checklist.

Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. For example. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. or add to this selection. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. and the poche depth. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. 2 In the Type Selector. You can load any family or group into a template. Although the options are endless. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Although this is possible. you may want to delete. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. For example. In addition. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. In the steps that follow. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. However. there are some important thoughts to consider. phase filters. you can set up the phases. title blocks. the section cut material. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . if you load every available window type. do so before starting this exercise. you could load detail components. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. or use the Project Browser.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. If this selection is satisfactory. you can move onto the next component type. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. modify. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you do both. or electrical fixtures. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. If necessary. you can set the default contour line interval. Depending on the intended use of this template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. furniture. and electrical fixtures. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Door. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Modify type properties. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. create. Select it. In the Element Properties dialog. or load a new door type.3 To modify. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. click Load. Enter a name. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. or modify a door. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Edit/New. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Bar. expand Families. and click Open. and click OK. create. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Make modifications. click Edit/New. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Click Duplicate. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.

9 Expand Annotation Symbols. To do so. and click Delete. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. View Range. load. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. This title block is currently part of the template. Detail Level. and select the title block type. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.) 10 Expand the title block. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you created new projects using different templates. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. In addition. click 12 Click Preview. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create the views required for your template. To load a title block. create. Discipline. (Element Properties). 13 Click OK. right-click the component. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. click Load. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In addition.

17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 6 Click OK. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Every time a new plan view is created. and double-click Level 1. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. select Site Plan. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. you can apply a view template to any view. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . At any time. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. In this exercise. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. select Architectural Plan. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. under Floor Plans. you will first modify view templates. double-click Level 2. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and then click OK. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and apply the appropriate template. double-click Site. 11 Click Apply. under Elevations. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. under Floor Plans. click Apply. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. and click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 18 If you modified any other view templates. and click OK.settings of categories and subcategories. 4 If necessary. open the view from the Project Browser. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. In addition. 2 Under Names. After applying the template. double-click South. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template.

and click Save View. and select the desired direction. click Orient to View. or delete them as needed. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. click Schedule/Quantities. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . right-click the ViewCube. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Rename the 3D View. and select the desired view. right-click the view name. and. review the existing floor plans. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. on the View toolbar. duplicate. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click Orient to a Direction. right-click the ViewCube. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. If it does not display. 30 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. 23 To add more levels to the template. notice that you have the option to rename. To orient the 3D view to another view. in the Project Browser. enter a view name. Black level heads have no associated views. use the ViewCube. select Make Plan View. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. By default. or an edge of the ViewCube. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. in the shortcut menu. Blue level heads have associated plan views. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 21 In the Project Browser. If prompted. review the floor plans. click Level. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and elevations. right-click Level 1. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. or delete this view. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 27 Create additional levels as needed. under Floor Plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. (Default 3D View). Rename. a face. duplicate. and click Rename. If you want to modify view properties. ceiling plans.Notice the level names. To orient the 3D view to a direction.

in the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. and click OK. assign filters.txt for MicroStation). 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. modify settings as needed. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Add View. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. and modify their properties accordingly. and click Rename.txt for AutoCAD. select one. click Sheet. 42 Create new sheets as needed. To do so. Right-click the sheet name. To later add a title block to a sheet. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. 40 To add views to the sheet. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select the default title block. modify settings as needed. 37 Click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. or exportlayersdgn. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select and order required fields. select the title block and delete it. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Formatting tab. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. select the category type. You can still add views to the sheet. On the Appearance tab. You are prompted to select a title block.You can add schedules to a template. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. modify settings as needed. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. and click OK. Select a view. After the sheet is created.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and so on.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Using shared parameters. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Save As. name the file. 9 Click Save As. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. select Save As. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. windows. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. When scheduling. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 5 For each category. These settings are retained within the project template. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. name the file. doors. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and click Save. and so on. 2 For each category. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save these mappings to a text file. therefore. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 8 In the dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. For example. When you create a multi-category schedule. project parameters. and they become the set mappings for the project. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. name the file. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). They cannot be shared with other projects. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. for example. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters.

23 Add project parameters as needed. you can create a list of parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 22 Click OK. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 18 Under Type of Parameter. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. under Groups. 11 For each parameter group. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. you may want to save the file to a network location. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. For each parameter group. project parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Under Group parameter under. 25 Click Select. 21 Under Categories. and select Shared Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. click Add. for Name. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and click OK. select a group to add parameters to. 10 Click OK. select a parameter value type. 2 Click Create. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. enter a parameter name. If this template will be used by multiple team members. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 3 Name and save the file.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a parameter discipline type. 14 Click Add. 9 Name the parameter. 26 Click OK. add required parameters. 8 Under Parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 17 Under Discipline. select Project parameter. and specify its discipline and type. 16 Under Parameter Data. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click New. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 5 Enter the group name. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog.

you create named print settings. and print. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. By going first to the Print command. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. enter a name for the schedule. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. For each printer. 35 For Name. select Multi-Category. paper placement. you can load them into the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you need only select a setting. and make it your default template file. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. select the tag. In this exercise. or refer to the online help. The tag is now part of the template. you can set options such as sheet sizes. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 5 Click Save As. 2 Under Printer. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and click OK. By creating named settings within the template. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 34 For Category. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and click Open. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 32 Navigate to the directory.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. and the percent of actual size. 4 Modify the printer settings. click Schedule/Quantities. click Setup. 6 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 3 Under Settings. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. save the file as a template. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. For information on creating multi-category tags. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. for Name. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. make minor modifications if necessary. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 28 Click OK. click OK. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845.

you modified settings. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. If you need to share this file with others. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and saved them to a template.rte). Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. click Browse. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open. 24 Navigate to the template location. The only remaining task is to save it. 19 Select the template. click Save as. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 14 Under Save as type. click Setup. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In this lesson. and click OK. and click Save. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 20 Click OK. 25 Click OK. If you have a project. 15 Name the template. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. enter a new name for the printer. 18 Click Browse. Your template is complete. select Template Files (*. loaded components. Create additional settings as needed. In addition. and click Open. By investing the time to individualize your template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. select it. modify the printer settings. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. save it in a network location. select a different printer. In addition. 11 Click Close when finished. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 23 For Default template file. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and create new settings for this printer. 9 In the Print dialog. You can also set this template as your default template.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful